Telenium IP. Key Telephone System. Station User Guide

Transcription

1 Telenium IP Key Telephone System Station User Guide

2 I Issue Release Date Changes Page Initial Release Minor corrections for correctness and clarity Minor corrections for correctness and clarity Incorporates Phase 3 features. Adds new IP Phone models - IP7008D, IP7024D, & IP7024LD Ch 3, 4, & 5 ACD Agent Login/Logout revised to include ID 2-67 ACD Agent Unavailable & Reason Codes 2-65 ACD - Caller Entered Caller ID 2-68 ACD Calls in Queue Display 2-69 ACD Calls in Queue Message 2-70 ACD Calls in Queue Page Alert 2-70 ACD Group Call Pick-up 2-68 ACD Group Mailbox 2-71 ACD Group Name 2-73 ACD Multiple Supervisor 2-72 ACD Supervisor Login/Logout 2-73 ACD Wrap-up Button 2-74 ACD Wrap-up End Button 2-75 ACD Zap Tone 2-76 ACD-DND Auto Service 2-76 Answering Machine Emulation 2-6 Call Log Display 2-89 Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment Hot Desk Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signalling Msg Wait / Call Back procedure is changed Mobile Extension Multiple Voice Mailbox Support Push-To-Talk Paging 2-39 Short Message Service Station Name length is increased from 7 to characters Unsupervised Conference Timer Extension The Hot Desk feature is now supported on IP7008D phones

3 LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS POLICY VODAVI Technology, Inc. products are not authorized for and should not be used within Life Support applications. Life Support systems are equipment intended to support or sustain life and whose failure to perform when properly used in accordance with instructions provided can be reasonably expected to result in significant personal injury or death. VODAVI Technology, Inc. warranty is limited to replacement of defective components and does not cover injury to persons or property or other consequential damages. Copyright 2002 VODAVI Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by VODAVI Technology, Inc. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of the Copyright Laws of the United States (17 U.S.C. Section 101 et. seq.). VODAVI reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without notice. The information furnished by VODAVI in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. mlj/2006

4

5 Contents - i 1 Introduction Contents About This User Guide Organization of Features Single Line Telephone Features Numbering Plans Online Hyperlinks IP Digital Telephones IP24DH Telephone IP7024D Digital Telephone IP7024LD Digital Telephone IP7008D Digital Telephone Features Operation Account Code Alarm Signal / Doorbell Answering Machine Emulation Attendant Call/Queuing Attendant Features Alternate Attendant Attendant Call Forward Attendant Positions Attendant Recall Attendant Station Program Codes Authorization Codes Call Forward CO/IP Call Off-Net Attendant Call/Queuing Day / Night / Timed Ring Mode Disable CO/IP Outgoing Access DND Override DSS/BLF Consoles Cancel Feature Intrusion LCD Display Format Control Push-To-Talk Paging System Clock Set

6 Contents - ii Traffic Analysis - Overview Traffic Analysis - All Summary Reports Traffic Analysis - Attendant Traffic Report Traffic Analysis - Auto Attendant Traffic Report Traffic Analysis - Call Hourly and Call Summary Reports Traffic Analysis H/W Unit Usage Summary Report Traffic Analysis CO/IP Grp Summary & Hourly Reports 2-47 Voice Store & Forward (VSF) Auto Call Release Auto Called Number Redial Auto Release of Speaker Automatic Call Distribution VSF ANNOUNCEMENT AGENTS SUPERVISOR QUEUED CALL DISPLAY ON LCD ALTERNATE ACD DESTINATION OVERFLOW STATION/GROUP ASSIGNMENT ACD STATISTICS REPORT SUPERVISOR STATUS ACD Agent Unavailable & Reason Codes ACD Group Agent Login/Logout ACD Group Caller Entered Caller ID ACD Group Call Pick-Up ACD Group Calls In Queue Display ACD Group Calls in Queue Message ACD Group Calls In Queue Page Alert ACD Group Mailbox ACD Group Multiple Supervisor ACD Group Name ACD Group Supervisor Login/Logout ACD Group Wrap-up Button ACD Group Wrap-up End Button ACD Group Zap Tone Auto ACD-DND Service Automatic Pause Insertion Automatic Privacy Automatic Speaker Select Background Music

7 Contents - iii Broker Call Call Forward Call Forward, Preset Call Log Display Call Park Call Pick Up Directed Call Pick Up Group Call Pick Up Call Transfer Station Call Transfer CO/IP to CO/IP Call Transfer Call Transfer - Voice Mail Call Waiting / Camp On CO/IP Call Time Restriction (CCTR) CO/IP Call Warning Tone CO/IP Line Access CO/IP Line Groups CO/IP Line Ring Assignment CO/IP Line Name Display CO/IP Line Queuing CO Line Flash Conference Multi-Party Conference Unsupervised Conference CPI Message Wait Custom Messages Dial By Name Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover Dialing Privileges Class of Service Temporary Station COS Change (Station Lock) Walking COS DID Call Wait Differential Ring Direct Inward System Access Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Display Security Do Not Disturb DND - One Time DND

8 Contents - iv Door Open Emergency Call Executive/Secretary Pairs Flexible Numbering Plan Group Listening Headset Compatibility Hold Exclusive Hold System Hold Automatic Hold Hot Desk Howling Tone Intercom Intercom Call (ICM Call) Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling Intercom Lock-Out Intercom Signaling Mode Intercom Step Call Intercom Transfer IP Dialing ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) AOC (Advice of Charge) Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation Keypad Facility ISDN Supplementary Services Call Hold/Retrieve Broker Call ISDN Three-Party Conference Last Number Redial Message Wait / Call Back Message Wait Reminder Tone Mobile Extension Multiple Voice Mailbox Support Mute Networking Features Net Call Net Transfer Identification Service

9 Contents - v Call Completion Call Offer Net Conference Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Net Call Forward CO Transit-In CO Transit-Out Do-Not-Disturb (DND) (CAS) Attendant Call Off-Hook Signaling Off-Hook Voice Over On-Hook Dialing One-Touch Record Paging Internal/External & All Call Page Meet Me Page Answer Push-To-Talk Paging Pre-selected Messages Prime Line - Immediate/Delayed Private Line Ringing Line Preference (RLP) Save Number Redial (SNR) Short Message Service (SMS) SLT Name Entry SMDR Call Cost Display SMDR Call Records Lost Call Recording Speakerphone Station Call Coverage Station Flexible Buttons Station Groups Station Speed Dial Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment System Speed Dial System Speed Zone Group Station User Program Codes Two-Way Record Universal Night Answer

10 Contents - vi VSF-Voice Mail Message Storage Message Retrieval Remote Message Retrieval Message Retrieval Options Voice Mailbox Settings System Voice Memo Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan IP7008D Phone Call Pick-up Directed Call Pick-up Group Call Pick-up Calls Placing an Outside Call Placing an Intercom Call Call Waiting Camp On Flexible Button Programming Hold Last Number Redial Station Speed Dial Storing a Speed Dial Number Using a Speed Dial Number IP7024D Phone Calls Placing a Call Intercom CO Line Answering a Call Intercom CO Line Soft Buttons General Description Navigation Key Basic Functions Off Hook Mode

11 Contents - vii Intercom Dialing Mode Intercom Ring Back Mode Intercom Busy Mode Intercom Do Not Disturb Mode Intercom Dialing Error Mode Intercom Receiving Mode Intercom Talk Mode CO Line Busy Mode CO Dialing / CO Talk Mode Paging Mode Call Log Received Call Dialed Call Lost Call Menu Basic Program Advanced Program Speed Program Mobile Extension Program Hot Desk Program Phone Book Dial By ICM Name Dial By STA SPD Name Dial By SYS SPD Name IP7024LD Phone Calls Placing a Call Intercom CO Line Answering a Call Intercom CO Line Icons Soft Buttons & Navigation Key General Description Navigation Key Basic Functions Idle Mode

12 Contents - viii Pickup Conference Redial Off Hook Mode Intercom Dialing Mode Intercom Ring Back Mode Intercom Busy Mode Intercom Do Not Disturb Mode Intercom Dialing Error Mode Intercom Receiving Mode Intercom Talk Mode CO Line Busy Mode CO Dialing / CO Talk Mode Paging Mode Phone Book New Entry Search By Name Search By Number Search By Group Register CO Access Code Delete All Entries Menu Button Function Ez Menu Dialed Calls Received Calls Speed Dial Call Forward Absent Message Paging Do Not Disturb Wake Up Phone Book Schedule Schedule Add/Delete/Edit Find Schedule Delete Past Schedule Check Alarm Schedule Delete All Schedule Customize

13 Contents - ix Change Language Register Name Ring Type Speaker/Headset E-MIC Headset Setting Enblock Mode Station COS Password Answer Mode Voice Mail Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) Web-based Station Programming Station Programming Intro Station Attributes User Name Registration ICM Signaling Mode DND Authorization Code Call Forward Station Call Forward Preset Call Forward Station Speed Dial Preselected Message Canned Messages Custom Messages Flex Buttons Assignment Station List Management

14 Contents - x

15 1-1 1 Introduction This chapter explains how to use this book to locate some of the more commonly-used features and their functions. It also show the types of key telephones that can be used with the Telenium IP system.

16

17 About This User Guide 1-3 About This User Guide This section describes how to use this book to locate some of the more commonly-used features and their functions. Organization of Features Features in the Telenium IP Station User Guide are arranged in alphabetical order so that functions can be quickly located. Each feature contains the following sections, when applicable: Single Line Telephone Features Description Operation Conditions Related Features Hardware When the Single Line Telephone operation differs from the digital telephone, those differences are described in a subsection following an icon and heading as shown below. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE Provides a detailed description of the purpose of the feature. Provides a step-by-step operation to activate or access the feature. Outlines characteristics of the feature operation which may apply, as well as specific limitations related to the feature and other feature interactions. Defines other features which interact with, or are required for proper operation of, the feature being described. Defines any special hardware requirements or limitations, which may affect proper operation of the feature being described. Many SLT procedures contain steps to "Briefly press the hookswitch". If your SLT has a FLASH button, press [FLASH] instead of pressing the hookswitch. Pressing the hookswitch on SLTs with a FLASH button will end the call. Numbering Plans The following Default Feature Code Numbering Plans are located at the end of the User Guide for easy quick reference: Default Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Fixed Feature Code Numbering Plans

18 1-4 IP Digital Telephones Online Hyperlinks Hyperlinks (shown in blue) allow you to quickly navigate to the detailed description of the feature by clicking on the link with your mouse when using the guide in an electronic format. Page number cross references are also shown for quick navigation to the feature when using the guide in a paper format. Many Feature Codes shown in the Default Feature Code Numbering Plans are flexible. Your System Administrator should provide a listing of the Numbering Plan if Feature Codes have been modified to meet the specific needs of your organization. IP Digital Telephones IP24DH Telephone The following diagram and its corresponding table identify the basic features on the IP-24DH Keyset. TRANS FWD DND MUTE ICM SPEED REDIAL CONF MSG/CALLBK FLASH PGM SAVE VOLUME SPEAKER HOLD FLEXIBLE BUTTONS

19 IP Digital Telephones 1-5 IP24DH Keyset - Basic Features CONF DND FLASH FWD HOLD ICM MSG/CALLBK MUTE PGM REDIAL SAVE SPEED SPEAKER TRANS VOLUME Used to establish conference calls with up to 3 parties. Used to prevent calls from ringing at your station when on a call or busy. Used to end an outside call and to restore dial tone without hanging up the receiver. Use to send unanswered calls to another station or Hunt group. Used to hold calls and to retrieve held calls. The hands-free Intercom feature is used in place of the handset to answer intercom calls or place a call on Hold. Used for Auto-CallBack to a phone that has left a text message or to access voice messages. Used to activate/deactivate MUTE function. When activated, the party on the other end cannot hear you. Used to modify system and station settings. Used to access and dial 1 of the last 10 numbers dialed. Used to preserve setting changes. Used to access speed dialing, save number redial, and last number redial. Button is also used to access flexible button programming. Used to make a call without lifting the handset. Used to transfer intercom or outside call from one station to another. Used to adjust level of tones, background music, ringing, and receiver volume. These buttons are used to scroll through the various programming options. 24 Flexible Buttons Used to access outside lines or call-handling features.

20 1-6 IP Digital Telephones IP7024D Digital Telephone The following diagram and its corresponding table identify the basic features on the IP7024D keyset

21 IP Digital Telephones 1-7 IP7024D Keyset - Basic Features 1 Handset Used for handset call. 2 Headphone When using a headphone, this button toggles the headphone state. 3 Speaker Device used to listen to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode. 4 Speed Used to access speed dialing, save number redial, and last number redial. Button is also used to access flexible button programming. 5 DND The Do Not Disturb feature lets you activate a do not ring this phone mode. When DND is active, this button is red. 6 Speaker Button Speaker toggles speakerphone state between speaker mode and handset mode. The button is red when speakerphone is active. 7 Hold/Save This button puts a call on hold or saves the PGM. 8 3 Soft Buttons Used to work in conjunction with fixed and flexible features. 9 LCD Display Displays phone status information, dialing directories, and test message information. 10 Ring LED Illuminates when the phone is ringing. 11 Trans/PGM This button is used to set up a conference call or transfer a call. 12 Flexible The remaining XX Flex buttons can be assigned a feature. 13 Call back A station can initiate a call back request to another busy station. Once that station becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is signaled. 14 Volume The volume button adjusts the audio level. 15 MIC Microphone used to speak to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode. 16 Menu Use the menu button to move to the desired option (Dial, MSG, Program) and use for arrows key. 17 Phone Book Use this button to save a phone number and to make calls with saved information.

22 1-8 IP Digital Telephones IP7024LD Digital Telephone The following diagram and its corresponding table identify the basic features on the IP7024LD keyset

23 IP Digital Telephones 1-9 IP7024LD Keyset - Basic Features 1 Handset Used for handset call. 2 Earphone Jack Socket An optional earphone can be plugged in to provide handsfree operation. 3 Speaker Device used to listen to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode. 4 Speed Used to access speed dialing, save number redial, and last number redial. Button is also used to access flexible button programming. 5 DND The Do Not Disturb feature lets you activate a do not ring this phone mode. When DND is active, this button is red. 6 Speaker Button Speaker toggles speakerphone state between speaker mode and handset mode. The button is red when speakerphone is active. 7 Hold/Save This button puts a call on hold or saves information when programming. 8 Phone Book Use this button to save a phone number and to make calls with saved information. 9 LCD Display Displays phone status information, dialing directories, and test message information. 10 Ring LED Illuminates when the phone is ringing Soft Buttons Used to work in conjunction with fixed and flexible features. 12 Flexible Buttons The remaining XX Flex buttons can be assigned a feature. 13 Trans/PGM This button is used to set up a conference call or transfer a call. 14 Call back A station can initiate a call back request to another busy station. Once that station becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is signaled. 15 Volume The volume button adjusts the audio level. 16 Menu Use the menu button to move to the desired option (Dial, MSG, Program) and use for arrows key. 17 Handsfree Microphone Microphone used to speak to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode.

24 1-10 IP Digital Telephones IP7008D Digital Telephone The following diagram and its corresponding table identify the basic features of the IP7008D keyset

25 IP Digital Telephones 1-11 IP7008D Keyset - Basic Features 1 LCD Display Displays information about telephone status, dialing directories, and test message information. 2 Handset Device used to listen/speak when on a call in handset mode. 3 Headphone When using a headphone, this button toggles the headphone state. 4 Speaker Device used to listen to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode. 5 Speaker Button Speaker toggles speakerphone state between speaker mode and handset mode. The button is red when speakerphone is active. 6 Hold/Save Button This button puts a call on hold or saves the PGM. 7 Volume The volume button adjusts the audio level. 8 MSG LED This button illuminated to indicate you have a message waiting. 9 Flexible Buttons The 8 flexible buttons can be assigned as specific feature buttons. 10 DND Button (Flex Btn 1) 11 Call Back Button (Flex Btn 2) The Do Not Disturb (DND) feature disables your phone from ringing. When DND is active, this button is red. A station can initiate a call back request to another busy station. Once that station becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is signaled. 12 Speed Button Used to access speed dialing, save number redial, and last number redial. Also used to access flexible button programming. 13 Trans/PGM Button This button is used to set up a conference call or to transfer a call. 14 MIC Microphone used to speak to a caller in a handsfree mode when in speaker mode.

26 1-12 IP Digital Telephones

27 2-1 2 Features Operation The procedures in this chapter generally apply to all IP keysets described in the preceding section. Procedures that may slightly differ for IP7008D, IP7024D, and IP7024LD keysets based on soft keys, a navigation button, and other buttons that may be different are located at Chapter 3, Chapter 4 and Chapter 5.

28

29 Account Code 2-3 Account Code Description Station users may allow tracking specific calls by entering a non-verified, variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier. This identifier or "Account Code" is displayed in the SMDR record. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as an Account Code entry button. The {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button may include the account code to function as a {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button. Operation To assign {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible buttons: {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [84] + [SAVE] {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [84] + Account Code + [SAVE] To enter an Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button prior to placing call: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button. 3. Dial the Account Code. 4. Press [ ]. Intercom dial tone sounds. 5. Place the CO/IP call as normal, -OR- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button. Intercom dial tone sounds. 3. Place the CO/IP call as normal. To enter Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button during a conversation with an external party: 1. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} button. 2. Dial the Account Code. 3. Dial [ ]. -or- Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button.

30 2-4 Alarm Signal / Doorbell SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To enter an Account Code prior to placing a call: 1. Lift the Handset. 2. Dial Flexible Numbering dial code [550]. 3. Dial the Account Code. 4. Briefly press the hookswitch. Intercom dial tone sounds. 5. Place the CO/IP call as normal. To enter an Account Code during a conversation with an external party: 1. Briefly press the hookswitch. Intercom dial tone sounds. 2. Dial Flexible Numbering feature code [550]. 3. Dial the Account Code. 4. Briefly press the hookswitch or dial [ ] to reconnect to the external party. Conditions» The outside CO/IP party will not hear the Account Code digits being entered (actual DTMF tones are not generated to the outside party).» A maximum of 1000 {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} flexible buttons may be assigned. Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 SMDR - page Station Flexible Buttons - page Alarm Signal / Doorbell Description The system can be programmed to recognize the status of an external contact (normally open or closed). When activated, the system will signal programmed IP Keysets. This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Doorbell Signals. An IP Keyset can be assigned to receive the signal. Stations assigned to receive the Alarm Signal will receive either a single tone repeated at one-minute intervals or a continuous tone. The signal can be terminated by dialing the appropriate code or an assigned {ALARM STOP} flexible button. To rearm the alarm, the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated.

31 Alarm Signal / Doorbell 2-5 When used as a Doorbell, assigned stations receive a single tone each time the contact is activated and no reset is required. Operation To activate the Door Open contacts: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Door Open code [# ] + contact number (1-2 for MFIM or 1-4 for MFIME). To assign an {ALARM STOP} flexible button to terminate Alarm Signal: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [565] + [SAVE] To terminate the alarm signal while idle: Dial the Flexible Numbering feature code [565]. Confirmation tone sounds and the alarm signal terminates. If the Alarm condition has been cleared, the system will rearm the alarm. -or- Press the {ALARM STOP} flexible button. To rearm alarm: Clear the alarm condition and terminate the alarm signal as above. The preceding steps can be done in either order. Conditions» The alarm contacts must be "dry" (no voltage/current source connected).» Only an IP Keyset can receive Alarm or Doorbell signals.» An IP keyset with LCD assigned to receive Alarm/Doorbell signals will show "ALARM" or "DOOR BELL", as appropriate. Related Features Door Open - page Hardware IP Keyset An external contact must be connected to the Alarm input on MFIM, refer to the Telenium IP Installation Manual.

32 2-6 Answering Machine Emulation Answering Machine Emulation Description When a call is sent to a voice mailbox, the associated station can be assigned to notify the user and allow the user to screen the call. Two methods of notification and call screening are provided - Ring or Speaker mode. In the Ring mode, the user is notified by flashing of the Answering Machine Emulation (AME) Flex button. The user may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message is stored. In the Speaker mode, when the call is sent to the Voice Mailbox, the caller's voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of the user's IP Keyset. The user may terminate the screening leaving the caller in voice mail to record a message, talk with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and disconnect the Voice Mail. The user's IP keyset must be assigned with an AME Flex button for proper operation. Operation IP Keyset To assign an {AME} button: Ring Mode = [PGM] + {FLEX} [SAVE] Speaker Mode = [PGM] + {FLEX} [SAVE] To screen a call in the Ring mode: Press the flashing {AME} button. The caller's voice is broadcast over the station speaker and stored in the Voice Mailbox. In the Speaker mode, broadcast of the caller's voice is automatic. To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail: Press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button. To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail: Press the illuminated [MUTE] button. To answer the call and cancel the voice message: Press the illuminated {AME} button, the caller is connected and the Voice Mail disconnected.

33 Attendant Call/Queuing 2-7 Conditions» AME is supported only on an IP Keyset and requires an {AME} Flex button be assigned on the phone.» If the user answers the call using the {AME} button, the caller is connected in the normal manner, the Voice Mail is disconnected and any message recorded by the caller is not stored. Related Features External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail VSF Voice Mail Hardware IP keyset Attendant Call/Queuing Description Any station can call Attendant by dialing the Attendant Call code [0]. When an Attendant call experiences a busy, the call is queued to the Attendant group. The call will be delivered to the first available Attendant. This feature must be enabled for use in PGM 160, Btn 9 programming. Operation To make a call to the Attendant: Dial Attendant Call Code [0]. Conditions» Call routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments, PGM 164.» The Attendant is informed of a queued Attendant call by the [HOLD] LED flashing. The calling intercom party will receive a ring-back tone or Music On Hold, as specified.» Calls to an Attendant s station number are received by the Attendant as with any intercom call.» When an Attendant dials another Attendant station number and receives a busy tone, Camp On can be used like a normal intercom call.

34 2-8 Attendant Features Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11 Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Attendant Features If your station is designated as an Attendant station, the following features are available to assist you in operating your telephone and controlling some system-related features. Alternate Attendant Description This feature allows an Attendant to place the Attendant station in an Unavailable mode. When in the Unavailable mode, the next available Attendant in the Attendant group will receive Attendant calls and recalls. There must be another Attendant available for this feature to work. Operation To assign an {AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [562] + [SAVE] To toggle attendant Unavailable feature: Dial the Alternate Attendant code [562]. -or- Press the {AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE} flexible button.

35 Attendant Features 2-9 Conditions» If a flexible button is assigned to activate the Alternate Attendant feature, the {AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE} LED indicates the status of the Alternate Attendant feature (On = Attendant Unavailable).» A station, which is receiving calls forwarded from the System Attendant, cannot use the Alternate Attendant feature.» When the System Attendant is in an Unavailable state, incoming calls and recalls for the System Attendant will ring at the first programmed Main Attendant station. If the first programmed Main Attendant then places their phone in an Unavailable state, the next programmed Main Attendant will receive those incoming calls and recalls.» When the System Attendant presses the preprogrammed {AVAILABLE/ UNAVAILABLE} flexible button to return to an available state: the LED extinguishes, the System Attendant resumes normal operation, and other Attendants will not receive calls/recalls intended for the System Attendant.» This feature does not affect calls to the intercom number (101,102,103) of the Attendant station.» This feature does not pass System Attendant features (Admin access) to another Attendant.» If the first Main Attendant is available and in an idle status, incoming calls, recalls, and dial 0 calls are directed to this Attendant station regardless of other Attendant stations status.» A special ring mode can be set up so the Alternate Attendant does not receive incoming CO (IP) ring until the Attendant places their phone in Unavailable mode.» If the last remaining Attendant attempts to activate this feature, an error tone results.» An Attendant forwarded to an Unavailable Attendant is also considered to be in the Unavailable Attendant mode.» When there is a queued Attendant call, the Unavailable Attendant station s [HOLD] button will flash, but no audible ring is provided and the station cannot retrieve the call. When an Attendant changes from Unavailable to Available status, any queued Attendant calls are available to the Attendant.

36 2-10 Attendant Features Attendant Call Forward Description The attendant can call forward to another station. Operation The Attendant Call Forward procedure is the same as the forward procedure of a station. To activate Attendant Call Forward (series-3000 phone): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. A dial tone is received. 2. Press [FWD] or dial feature code [554]. 3. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 4. Dial the Station number to which forwarding is desired. A confirmation tone sounds, the [FWD] LED flashes at 30 ipm, and the Station goes to an idle status automatically. To activate Attendant Call Forward (series-7000 phone): 1. Dial feature code [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 3. Dial the Station number to which forwarding is desired. A confirmation tone sounds. To deactivate Attendant Call Forward (series-3000 phone): While in an idle status, press [FWD]. -or- While in an off-hook status, press [FWD] and dial [#]. The [FWD] LED extinguishes. To deactivate Attendant Call Forward (series-7000 phone): Dial [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey, then dial [#]. Condition» If an Attendant (Main or System) uses the Unconditional Call Forward option, the forwarded station user receives all capabilities of the attendant (unless forwarded to an SLT station). In other cases (busy, no answer, busy / no answer), the forwarded station only serves to receive attendant calls and the forwarded station cannot activate Attendant features.

37 Attendant Features 2-11» If Unconditionally Call Forwarded to an SLT station, the SLT user can only process Attendant calls and recalls. An SLT station user cannot activate Attendant features.» When an Attendant cancels the forward, the previously forwarded station loses the capability to activate Attendant features.» Attempts to forward to another Attendant are not possible when other Attendants are unavailable. Related Features Call Forward Attendant Positions Description The Telenium IP System can have a maximum of four Attendants in an MFIM system or five Attendants in an MFIME system. Each Attendant position must be equipped with an IP LCD KTU. These positions may also include multiple DSS Consoles. The two types of Attendants are the System Attendant and Main Attendants. SYSTEM Attendant - The first programmed station in the Attendant Group is the System Attendant. In addition to Main Attendant features, the System Attendant can access System Attendant Programming, Admin Programming, and Ring Mode control. MAIN Attendant - The first station programmed in System Administration Programming is the System Attendant. Additional Attendants are Main Attendants. Conditions» By default, the first Attendant (System Attendant) is assigned as Station 100 (logical number). Others Attendants are not automatically assigned to a station number.» Attendant calls (dialing [0]) and recalls are routed to the first available Attendant.» Only the System Attendant can access System Attendant Programming and System Admin Programming. Hardware IP Keyset

38 2-12 Attendant Features Attendant Recall Description Unanswered or abandoned CO/IP calls which remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer Hold timer period, as appropriate, will recall the station placing the call on hold. If the call remains unanswered for the assigned Attendant Recall time, the first available Attendant also receives recall. The Attendant and station receive the recall signal for the Attendant Recall Timer period, after which the system disconnects and returns the CO/IP line to idle. Operation Attendant recall operation is automatic. Conditions» Recall to the attendant appears on the direct {CO} button. If there is not {CO button, the call is presented to the {LOOP} button» Exclusive Hold changes to System Hold when recall is activated to an attendant who is not in an Attendant Unavailable status.» CO lines marked private will not recall the attendant unless the attendant has an appearance of that line.» If the I-Hold Recall Timer is set to 0, recall is disabled. Related Features Call Transfer - page 2-94 Hold - page Attendant Station Program Codes Description Using the Attendant Station Program Codes the System Attendant can print SMDR and Traffic reports on-demand, enter Authorization Codes, control certain user features, record VSF AA announcements, enable/disable Auto Ring Mode Selection. Items are available using the Program Code directly or by scrolling in a multi-level display menu. The following indicates the menu displays, including the digit for selecting the item, the item description and further required entries.

39 Attendant Features 2-13 The various levels of the display menu are indicated by indentation. [01] Print [1] SMDR [1] Print SMDR (Sta Base) station range input [2] Delete Station Base station range input [3] Display Call Charge station number input [4] Abort Printing [5] Print Lost Call [6] Delete Lost Call [2] Traffic [1] Print All Summary select analysis time & type [2] Print All Periodic enter print time [3] Abort Periodic Print [4] Print Atd Traffic select analysis time & type [5] Print Call Summary [6] Print Call Hourly [7] Print H/W Usage select analysis time & type [8] Print CO Summary [9] Print CO Group Hourly enter CO Grp number [02] COS [1] Set ICM Only Mode enter station range [2] Restore COS enter station range [03] Authorization [1] Register Authorization enter station [2] Erase Authorization enter station

40 2-14 Attendant Features [04] Date And Time [1] System Date Time Set [2] LCD Date Mode Change [3] LCD Time Mode Change [4] Atd Set Wakeup Time register wakeup time Sta range [5] Atd Wakeup Disable erase wakeup time station range [05] Message [1] Pre-select Msg Reg enter station range [2] DND/FWD/Msg Cancel enter station range [3] Sys Custom Msg Reg enter station range & msg (11-20) [06] Rec VSF Announcement enter VSF AA announcement ( ) [07] Supplementary [1] Register Sta Name enter station number and name [2] Isolate CO Fault press CO flex btn (toggle) [3] Auto D/N/T Pgm Auto Ring Mode (1:on/0:off) [4] Ext Port#1 BGM En/di select enable/disable [5] Ext Port#2 Bgm En/di select enable/disable [6] LCD Display Language

41 Attendant Features 2-15 Operation To activate a User Program Code feature or function. 1. Press [PGM]. The User Program Menu displays. 2. Dial [0] to access the Attendant Station Program Codes. 3. Enter desired code and additional inputs as required; e.g., to Print SMDR (Stn Base), enter [0111] followed by the station range, -or- Use [VOL ] to display the desired menu item, then dial the digit indicated for the item and enter additional inputs if required. Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 Auto Ring Mode Selection Background Music - page 2-79 Custom Messages - page Dial By Name - page Pre-selected Messages - page SMDR - page Station Speed Dial - page System Clock Set - page 2-40 Temporary Station COS Change (Station Lock) - page Traffic Analysis - Overview - page 2-41 Voice Store & Forward (VSF) - page 2-48

42 2-16 Attendant Features Authorization Codes Description Authorization Codes provide a means to control access to VSF-VM, Remote Call Forward, Off-Premise, Walking COS, or DISA and may be required for CO/IP access based on the system database. An Authorization Code must be dialed that matches a stored Authorization Code. The dialed Authorization Code will be included in the SMDR call record. The System Attendant assigns Station Authorization Codes. The System Administrator enters System Authorization Codes via Admin programming. When a Station Authorization Code is entered, the system applies the associated Station Class of Service. When a System Authorization Code is entered, the system will apply the DISA COS for DISA and Call Forward, Off-Net calls and Station COS 1 for all other uses. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To assign a Station Authorization Code: [PGM] + [031] + Station Number + Password (up to 12 digits) + [SAVE] To delete Station Authorization Code(s): [PGM] + [032] + Station Range + [SAVE] USER To enter the Authorization Code: Enter the Station Authorization Code. -or- Dial [ ] and then enter a System Authorization Code.

43 Attendant Features 2-17 Conditions» When a DISA Line is marked for Authorization Code entry, the caller will hear a DND Warning tone and must dial an Authorization Code to access the DISA feature. The DISA user may retry entry of an Authorization Code in case of error based on the DISA Retry counter.» Authorization Codes may be entered at any station to place a CO/IP call (Walking COS).» The maximum number of Authorization Codes system-wide is 200 entries for MFIM systems and 600 for MFIME systems.» Duplicate Authorization Codes are allowed.» CO/IP Groups can be marked to deny access until a valid Authorization Code is entered. In this case, a second dial tone is provided when the CO/ IP Group access code is dialed. If the Authorization Code is invalid, an error tone sounds.» Any numeral can be used to create an Authorization Code. The [#] symbol cannot be used as part of an Authorization Code. Related Features Account Code - page 2-3 Call Forward, Off-Net - page 2-18 CO/IP Line Access - page CO/IP Line Groups - page Direct Inward System Access - page Temporary Station COS Change (Station Lock) - page Walking COS - page 2-122

44 2-18 Attendant Features Call Forward CO/IP Call Off-Net Description The System Attendant can forward incoming CO/IP calls to an Off-Net location. Calls are automatically forwarded to a Speed Dial Bin to connect the incoming call to an outside number in an unsupervised conference. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To activate Off-Net Forward of incoming CO/IP calls to an outside number (3000-series phone): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [FWD]. 3. Dial Off-Net Forward feature code [5]. 4. Dial CO/IP Line number or Line Group number. 5. Dial the Speed Dial Bin to be used to place outgoing call. The LED of any Off-Net Call Forward {CO/IP} flexible button at the Attendant stations will flutter. To activate Off-Net Forward of incoming CO/IP calls to an outside number (7000-series phone): 1. Dial [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial Off-Net Forward feature code [5]. 3. Dial CO/IP Line number or Line Group number. 4. Dial the Speed Dial Bin to be used to place outgoing call. The LED of any Off-Net Call Forward {CO/IP} flexible button at the Attendant stations will flutter. To deactivate CO/IP Off-Net Call Forward (3000-series phone): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [FWD] or dial forward code [554]. 3. Dial Off-Net Call Forward code [5]. 4. Dial CO/IP Line number or Line Group number. 5. Dial #. To deactivate CO/IP Off-Net Call Forward (7000-series phone): 1. Dial forward code [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial Off-Net Call Forward code [5]. 3. Dial CO/IP Line number or Line Group number. 4. Dial #.

45 Attendant Features 2-19 Conditions» The System Attendant can forward any CO/IP line, CO/IP Group or all CO/IP calls using the appropriate CO/IP dial access code. In addition, a flexible button assigned to a CO/IP line or groups may be forwarded using assigned flexible buttons.» The following feature conditions also apply: Call Forward Off-Net and Unsupervised Conference. Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Unsupervised Conference - page 2-110

46 2-20 Attendant Features Attendant Call/Queuing Description Any station can call Attendant by dialing the Attendant Call code [0]. When an Attendant call experiences a busy, the call is queued to the Attendant group. The call will be delivered to the first available Attendant. Operation To make a call to the Attendant: Dial Attendant Call Code [0]. Conditions» Call routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments, PGM 164.» The Attendant is informed of a queued Attendant call by the [HOLD] LED flashing. The calling intercom party will receive a ring-back tone or Music On Hold, as specified.» Calls to an Attendant s station number are received by the Attendant as with any intercom call.» When an Attendant dials another Attendant station number and receives a busy tone, Camp On can be used like a normal intercom call. Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11 Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page 2-142

47 Attendant Features 2-21 Day / Night / Timed Ring Mode Description Only the System Attendant can place the system into Day / Night / Timed Ring service mode, allowing ring assignments and answering privileges based on the system Day and Night assignments. The two methods of changing the ring mode are manually and automatically. The manual method uses the [DND] button to select the desired Day, Night, or Timed Ring Mode. The automatic method uses only day and night start time values that are set in PGM 233 of Admin programming. Default start time values are shown in the following table: Operation Date Day Start Time Night Start Time Timed Start Time Mon 09:00 18:00 --:-- Tues 09:00 18:00 --:-- Wed 09:00 18:00 --:-- Thu 09:00 18:00 --:-- Fri 09:00 18:00 --:-- Sat --:-- 00:00 --:-- Sun --:-- 00:00 --:-- To change Day / Night / Timed Ring Mode manually: 1. Press [DND] once while in Day Mode. The [DND] LED light flashes at 60 ipm - Timed Mode is active. 2. Press [DND] once while in Timed Ring Mode. The [DND] LED light is steady-on - Night Mode is active. 3. Press [DND] once while in Night Mode. The [DND] LED light is off - Day Mode is active. To enable/disable the automatic ring mode: 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes at 60 ipm and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [073]. 3. Dial [1] to enable or [0] to disable the automatic ring mode.

48 2-22 Attendant Features Conditions» Only the System Attendant can change Day / Night / Timed Ring Mode manually and program the Day / Night / Timed Ring Table.» Stations receive incoming ring for CO lines based on the database assignments and the system mode (Day / Night /Timed) when the call arrives.» When Auto Ring Mode is enabled and the Day / Night / Timed Ring Table (PGM 233) is programmed, the ring, COS and CO/IP access mode is changed automatically based on the times assigned in the table.» The System Attendant always has manual control of the System mode by enabling/disabling the Auto Ring Mode Selection. Programming CO Base CO Line Ring Assignment (PGM 144) System Base External Control Contact (PGM 168) Day/Night/Timed Ring Table (PGM 233) Related Features CO/IP Line Ring Assignment - page Dialing Privileges - page System Clock Set - page 2-40

49 Attendant Features 2-23 Disable CO/IP Outgoing Access Description The System Attendant can place CO/IP lines out-of service, disabling outgoing calls on the CO/IP path. This is normally done if an undetectable fault interrupts service on a CO/IP path. Incoming calls continue to be processed normally. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To disable/enable Outgoing CO/IP access (toggle): 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [072]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Press the {CO} flexible button of the line(s) to be disabled. Confirmation tone sounds and the status for the selected lines is changed. Conditions» Only the System Attendant can activate this feature.» If the desired CO/IP line is in use, the System Attendant may still disable the CO/IP line. The feature will take effect after the desired CO/IP line goes to idle.» Once the line is disabled, all Attendant appearances for the disabled CO/IP line will flash at a 240 flutter rate. All other stations will show the CO/IP line as busy (LED ON) and a busy tone will sound if the disabled {CO} button is pressed.» The CO/IP line outgoing access status is stored in battery-protected memory in case of a power failure.» Multiple CO/IP lines may be enabled/disabled without redialing the Attendant Station Program code. Confirmation tone sounds after each CO/IP line is enabled/disabled.» When fault is detected from gateway for analog CO lines, these CO lines are disabled for outgoing access automatically.» Incoming calls on a disabled CO/IP line will continue to operate normally. Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11

50 2-24 Attendant Features DND Override Description A station in the DND mode cannot generally receive an incoming call. However, both the Attendant and the Secretary station of an Executive/Secretary pair may override the DND status to signal the station of an awaiting call. ATTENDANT OR SECRETARY To activate the DND Override, while receiving DND tone: Dial the last digit of the dialed station number, -or- Press the {CAMP ON} flexible button. The call signals at DND station and the DND warning tone changes to a ringback tone at the Attendant/Secretary station. To assign a {Camp On} flexible button: [PGM] + {Flex} + [PGM] + [88] + [SAVE] Conditions» An Attendant may use Override to transfer a CO/IP call to a station in DND. Related Features Do Not Disturb - page Executive/Secretary Pairs - page Intrusion - page 2-37

51 Attendant Features 2-25 DSS/BLF Consoles Description The system allows DSS/BLF Consoles to be installed and associated with a station (up to 3 per station in an MFIM system and 9 per station for an MFIME system). Each button on the console can be flexibly assigned as CO line, IP call, or feature key. For ease of programming, each console is assigned to one of three maps in the database. The user or Administrator may then change individual flexible buttons as desired. Operation of the DSS/BLF Console flexible buttons is the same as flexible buttons on the IP Keyset. Conditions» The DSS/BLF Console is assigned to operate in connection with a station.» There is no limit to the number of DSS/BLF units in a system. The button assignment of each map is fixed as follows: Flex 1 Intrusion Flex 2 All Call Page Flex 3 Call Park 01 Flex 4 Hunt Pilot 620 Flex 5 Camp On Flex 6 Int All Call Page Flex 7 Call Park 02 Flex 8 Hunt Pilot 621 Flex 9 Monitor Key Flex 10 Ext All Call Page Flex 11 Call Park 03 Flex 12 Hunt Pilot 622 Flex 13 Sta 100 Flex 14 Sta 101 Flex 15 Sta 102 Flex 16 Sta 103 Flex 17 Sta 104 Flex 18 Sta 105 Flex 19 Sta 106 Flex 20 Sta 107 Flex 21 Sta 108 Flex 22 Sta 109 Flex 23 Sta 110 Flex 24 Sta 111 Flex 25 Sta 112 Flex 26 Sta 113 Flex 27 Sta 114 Flex 28 Sta 115 Flex 29 Sta 116 Flex 30 Sta 117 Flex 31 Sta 118 Flex 32 Sta 119 Flex 33 Sta 120 Flex 34 Sta 121 Flex 35 Sta 122 Flex 36 Sta 123 Figure 2-1: DSS Map 1 (MFIM & MFIME) Flex 37 Sta 124 Flex 38 Sta 125 Flex 39 Sta 126 Flex 40 Sta 127 Flex 41 Sta 128 Flex 42 Sta 129 Flex 43 Sta 130 Flex 44 Sta 131 Flex 45 Sta 132 Flex 46 Sta 133 Flex 47 Sta 134 Flex 48 Sta 135

52 2-26 Attendant Features Flex 1 Sta 126 Flex 13 Sta 138 Flex 25 Sta 150 Flex 37 Sta 162 Flex 2 Sta 127 Flex 14 Sta 139 Flex 26 Sta 151 Flex 38 Sta 163 Flex 3 Sta 128 Flex 15 Sta 140 Flex 27 Sta 152 Flex 39 Sta 164 Flex 4 Sta 129 Flex 16 Sta 141 Flex 28 Sta 153 Flex 40 Sta 165 Flex 5 Sta 130 Flex 17 Sta 142 Flex 29 Sta 154 Flex 41 Sta 166 Flex 6 Sta 131 Flex 18 Sta 143 Flex 30 Sta 155 Flex 42 Sta 167 Flex 7 Sta 132 Flex 19 Sta 144 Flex 31 Sta 156 Flex 43 Sta 168 Flex 8 Sta 133 Flex 20 Sta 145 Flex 32 Sta 157 Flex 44 Sta 169 Flex 9 Sta 134 Flex 21 Sta 146 Flex 33 Sta 158 Flex 45 Empty Flex 10 Sta 135 Flex 22 Sta 147 Flex 34 Sta 159 Flex 46 Empty Flex 11 Sta 136 Flex 23 Sta 148 Flex 35 Sta 160 Flex 47 Empty Flex 12 Sta 137 Flex 24 Sta 149 Flex 36 Sta 161 Flex 48 Empty Figure 2-2: DSS Map 2 (MFIM)

53 Attendant Features 2-27 Flex 1 CO1 Flex 13 CO13 Flex 25 CO25 Flex 37 CO37 Flex 2 CO2 Flex 14 CO14 Flex 26 CO26 Flex 38 CO38 Flex 3 CO3 Flex 15 CO15 Flex 27 CO27 Flex 39 CO39 Flex 4 CO4 Flex 16 CO16 Flex 28 CO28 Flex 40 CO40 Flex 5 CO5 Flex 17 CO17 Flex 29 CO29 Flex 41 CO41 Flex 6 CO6 Flex 18 CO18 Flex 30 CO30 Flex 42 CO42 Flex 7 CO7 Flex 19 CO19 Flex 31 CO31 Flex 43 EMPTY Flex 8 CO8 Flex 20 CO20 Flex 32 CO32 Flex 44 EMPTY Flex 9 CO9 Flex 21 CO21 Flex 33 CO33 Flex 45 EMPTY Flex 10 CO10 Flex 22 CO22 Flex 34 CO34 Flex 46 EMPTY Flex 11 CO11 Flex 23 CO23 Flex 35 CO35 Flex 47 EMPTY Flex 12 CO12 Flex 24 CO24 Flex 36 CO36 Flex 48 EMPTY Figure 2-3: DSS Map 3 (MFIM)

54 2-28 Attendant Features Flex 1 Sta 136 Flex 13 Sta 148 Flex 25 Sta 160 Flex 37 Sta 172 Flex 2 Sta 137 Flex 14 Sta 149 Flex 26 Sta 161 Flex 38 Sta 173 Flex 3 Sta 138 Flex 15 Sta 150 Flex 27 Sta 162 Flex 39 Sta 174 Flex 4 Sta 139 Flex 16 Sta 151 Flex 28 Sta 163 Flex 40 Sta 175 Flex 5 Sta 140 Flex 17 Sta 152 Flex 29 Sta 164 Flex 41 Sta 176 Flex 6 Sta 141 Flex 18 Sta 153 Flex 30 Sta 165 Flex 42 Sta 177 Flex 7 Sta 142 Flex 19 Sta 154 Flex 31 Sta 166 Flex 43 Sta 178 Flex 8 Sta 143 Flex 20 Sta 155 Flex 32 Sta 167 Flex 44 Sta 179 Flex 9 Sta 144 Flex 21 Sta 156 Flex 33 Sta 168 Flex 45 Sta 180 Flex 10 Sta 145 Flex 22 Sta 157 Flex 34 Sta 169 Flex 46 Sta 181 Flex 11 Sta 146 Flex 23 Sta 158 Flex 35 Sta 170 Flex 47 Sta 182 Flex 12 Sta 147 Flex 24 Sta 159 Flex 36 Sta 171 Flex 48 Sta 183 Figure 2-4: DSS Map 2 (MFIME)

55 Attendant Features 2-29 Flex 1 Sta 184 Flex 13 Sta 196 Flex 25 Sta 208 Flex 37 Sta 220 Flex 2 Sta 185 Flex 14 Sta 197 Flex 26 Sta 209 Flex 38 Sta 221 Flex 3 Sta 186 Flex 15 Sta 198 Flex 27 Sta 210 Flex 39 Sta 222 Flex 4 Sta 187 Flex 16 Sta 199 Flex 28 Sta 211 Flex 40 Sta 223 Flex 5 Sta 188 Flex 17 Sta 200 Flex 29 Sta 212 Flex 41 Sta 224 Flex 6 Sta 189 Flex 18 Sta 201 Flex 30 Sta 213 Flex 42 Sta 225 Flex 7 Sta 190 Flex 19 Sta 202 Flex 31 Sta 214 Flex 43 Sta 226 Flex 8 Sta 191 Flex 20 Sta 203 Flex 32 Sta 215 Flex 44 Sta 227 Flex 9 Sta 192 Flex 21 Sta 204 Flex 33 Sta 216 Flex 45 Sta 228 Flex 10 Sta 193 Flex 22 Sta 205 Flex 34 Sta 217 Flex 46 Sta 229 Flex 11 Sta 194 Flex 23 Sta 206 Flex 35 Sta 218 Flex 47 Sta 230 Flex 12 Sta 195 Flex 24 Sta 207 Flex 36 Sta 219 Flex 48 Sta 231 Figure 2-5: DSS Map 3 (MFIME)

56 2-30 Attendant Features Flex 1 Sta 232 Flex 13 Sta 244 Flex 25 Sta 256 Flex 37 Sta 268 Flex 2 Sta 233 Flex 14 Sta 245 Flex 26 Sta 257 Flex 38 Sta 269 Flex 3 Sta 234 Flex 15 Sta 246 Flex 27 Sta 258 Flex 39 Sta 270 Flex 4 Sta 235 Flex 16 Sta 247 Flex 28 Sta 259 Flex 40 Sta 271 Flex 5 Sta 236 Flex 17 Sta 248 Flex 29 Sta 260 Flex 41 Sta 272 Flex 6 Sta 237 Flex 18 Sta 249 Flex 30 Sta 261 Flex 42 Sta 273 Flex 7 Sta 238 Flex 19 Sta 250 Flex 31 Sta 262 Flex 43 Sta 274 Flex 8 Sta 239 Flex 20 Sta 251 Flex 32 Sta 263 Flex 44 Sta 275 Flex 9 Sta 240 Flex 21 Sta 252 Flex 33 Sta 264 Flex 45 Sta 276 Flex 10 Sta 241 Flex 22 Sta 253 Flex 34 Sta 265 Flex 46 Sta 277 Flex 11 Sta 242 Flex 23 Sta 254 Flex 35 Sta 266 Flex 47 Sta 278 Flex 12 Sta 243 Flex 24 Sta 255 Flex 36 Sta 267 Flex 48 Sta 279 Figure 2-6: DSS Map 4 (MFIME)

57 Attendant Features 2-31 Flex 1 Sta 280 Flex 13 Sta 292 Flex 25 Sta 304 Flex 37 Sta 316 Flex 2 Sta 281 Flex 14 Sta 293 Flex 26 Sta 305 Flex 38 Sta 317 Flex 3 Sta 282 Flex 15 Sta 294 Flex 27 Sta 306 Flex 39 Sta 318 Flex 4 Sta 283 Flex 16 Sta 295 Flex 28 Sta 307 Flex 40 Sta 319 Flex 5 Sta 284 Flex 17 Sta 296 Flex 29 Sta 308 Flex 41 Sta 320 Flex 6 Sta 285 Flex 18 Sta 297 Flex 30 Sta 309 Flex 42 Sta 321 Flex 7 Sta 286 Flex 19 Sta 298 Flex 31 Sta 310 Flex 43 Sta 322 Flex 8 Sta 287 Flex 20 Sta 299 Flex 32 Sta 311 Flex 44 Sta 323 Flex 9 Sta 288 Flex 21 Sta 300 Flex 33 Sta 312 Flex 45 Sta 324 Flex 10 Sta 289 Flex 22 Sta 301 Flex 34 Sta 313 Flex 46 Sta 325 Flex 11 Sta 290 Flex 23 Sta 302 Flex 35 Sta 314 Flex 47 Sta 326 Flex 12 Sta 291 Flex 24 Sta 303 Flex 36 Sta 315 Flex 48 Sta 327 Figure 2-7: DSS Map 5 (MFIME)

58 2-32 Attendant Features Flex 1 CO Line 1 Flex 13 CO Line 13 Flex 25 CO Line 25 Flex 37 CO Line 37 Flex 2 CO Line 2 Flex 14 CO Line 14 Flex 26 CO Line 26 Flex 38 CO Line 38 Flex 3 CO Line 3 Flex 15 CO Line 15 Flex 27 CO Line 27 Flex 39 CO Line 39 Flex 4 CO Line 4 Flex 16 CO Line 16 Flex 28 CO Line 28 Flex 40 CO Line 40 Flex 5 CO Line 5 Flex 17 CO Line 17 Flex 29 CO Line 29 Flex 41 CO Line 41 Flex 6 CO Line 6 Flex 18 CO Line 18 Flex 30 CO Line 30 Flex 42 CO Line 42 Flex 7 CO Line 7 Flex 19 CO Line 19 Flex 31 CO Line 31 Flex 43 CO Line 43 Flex 8 CO Line 8 Flex 20 CO Line 20 Flex 32 CO Line 32 Flex 44 CO Line 44 Flex 9 CO Line 9 Flex 21 CO Line 21 Flex 33 CO Line 33 Flex 45 CO Line 45 Flex 10 CO Line 10 Flex 22 CO Line 22 Flex 34 CO Line 34 Flex 46 CO Line 46 Flex 11 CO Line 11 Flex 23 CO Line 23 Flex 35 CO Line 35 Flex 47 CO Line 47 Flex 12 CO Line 12 Flex 24 CO Line 24 Flex 36 CO Line 36 Flex 48 CO Line 48 Figure 2-8: DSS Map 6 (MFIME)

59 Attendant Features 2-33 Flex 1 CO Line 49 Flex 13 CO Line 61 Flex 25 CO Line 73 Flex 37 CO Line 85 Flex 2 CO Line 50 Flex 14 CO Line 62 Flex 26 CO Line 74 Flex 38 CO Line 86 Flex 3 CO Line 51 Flex 15 CO Line 63 Flex 27 CO Line 75 Flex 39 CO Line 87 Flex 4 CO Line 52 Flex 16 CO Line 64 Flex 28 CO Line 76 Flex 40 CO Line 88 Flex 5 CO Line 53 Flex 17 CO Line 65 Flex 29 CO Line 77 Flex 41 CO Line 89 Flex 6 CO Line 54 Flex 18 CO Line 66 Flex 30 CO Line 78 Flex 42 CO Line 90 Flex 7 CO Line 55 Flex 19 CO Line 67 Flex 31 CO Line 79 Flex 43 CO Line 91 Flex 8 CO Line 56 Flex 20 CO Line 68 Flex 32 CO Line 80 Flex 44 CO Line 92 Flex 9 CO Line 57 Flex 21 CO Line 69 Flex 33 CO Line 81 Flex 45 CO Line 93 Flex 10 CO Line 58 Flex 22 CO Line 70 Flex 34 CO Line 82 Flex 46 CO Line 94 Flex 11 CO Line 59 Flex 23 CO Line 71 Flex 35 CO Line 83 Flex 47 CO Line 95 Flex 12 CO Line 60 Flex 24 CO Line 72 Flex 36 CO Line 84 Flex 48 CO Line 96 Figure 2-9: DSS Map 7 (MFIME)

60 2-34 Attendant Features Flex 1 CO Line 97 Flex 13 CO Line 109 Flex 25 CO Line 121 Flex 37 CO Line 133 Flex 2 CO Line 98 Flex 14 CO Line 110 Flex 26 CO Line 122 Flex 38 CO Line 134 Flex 3 CO Line 99 Flex 15 CO Line 111 Flex 27 CO Line 123 Flex 39 CO Line 135 Flex 4 CO Line 100 Flex 16 CO Line 112 Flex 28 CO Line 124 Flex 40 CO Line 136 Flex 5 CO Line 101 Flex 17 CO Line 113 Flex 29 CO Line 125 Flex 41 CO Line 137 Flex 6 CO Line 102 Flex 18 CO Line 114 Flex 30 CO Line 126 Flex 42 CO Line 138 Flex 7 CO Line 103 Flex 19 CO Line 115 Flex 31 CO Line 127 Flex 43 CO Line 139 Flex 8 CO Line 104 Flex 20 CO Line 116 Flex 32 CO Line 128 Flex 44 CO Line 140 Flex 9 CO Line 105 Flex 21 CO Line 117 Flex 33 CO Line 129 Flex 45 CO Line 141 Flex 10 CO Line 106 Flex 22 CO Line 118 Flex 34 CO Line 130 Flex 46 CO Line 142 Flex 11 CO Line 107 Flex 23 CO Line 119 Flex 35 CO Line 131 Flex 47 CO Line 143 Flex 12 CO Line 108 Flex 24 CO Line 120 Flex 36 CO Line 132 Flex 48 CO Line 144 Figure 2-10: DSS Map 8 (MFIME)

61 Attendant Features 2-35 Flex 1 CO Line 145 Flex 13 CO Line 157 Flex 25 CO Line 169 Flex 37 CO Line 181 Flex 2 CO Line 146 Flex 14 CO Line 158 Flex 26 CO Line 170 Flex 38 CO Line 182 Flex 3 CO Line 147 Flex 15 CO Line 159 Flex 27 CO Line 171 Flex 39 CO Line 183 Flex 4 CO Line 148 Flex 16 CO Line 160 Flex 28 CO Line 172 Flex 40 CO Line 184 Flex 5 CO Line 149 Flex 17 CO Line 161 Flex 29 CO Line 173 Flex 41 CO Line 185 Flex 6 CO Line 150 Flex 18 CO Line 162 Flex 30 CO Line 174 Flex 42 CO Line 186 Flex 7 CO Line 151 Flex 19 CO Line 163 Flex 31 CO Line 175 Flex 43 CO Line 187 Flex 8 CO Line 152 Flex 20 CO Line 164 Flex 32 CO Line 176 Flex 44 CO Line 188 Flex 9 CO Line 153 Flex 21 CO Line 165 Flex 33 CO Line 177 Flex 45 CO Line 189 Flex 10 CO Line 154 Flex 22 CO Line 166 Flex 34 CO Line 178 Flex 46 CO Line 190 Flex 11 CO Line 155 Flex 23 CO Line 167 Flex 35 CO Line 179 Flex 47 CO Line 191 Flex 12 CO Line 156 Flex 24 CO Line 168 Flex 36 CO Line 180 Flex 48 CO Line 192 Figure 2-11: DSS Map 9 (MFIME) Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11 Station Flexible Buttons - page Hardware DSS/BLF Console

62 2-36 Attendant Features Cancel Feature Description The System Attendant can cancel features such as DND, Call Forwarding, and Pre-selected messages that are active at other stations. Operation To deactivate DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected Message for other stations: 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [052]. 3. Dial the desired station range or the same station number twice for a single station. 4. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and Attendant station goes to idle status automatically. Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11 Call Forward - page 2-82 Do Not Disturb - page Pre-selected Messages - page 2-182

63 Attendant Features 2-37 Intrusion Description An Attendant can intrude upon an active station conversation. When the Attendant intrudes an Intrusion Tone is provided, if assigned, and a conference is established between the Attendant, station, and the CO/IP party. Intrusion can only be activated using an {ATD INTRUSION} flexible button. Operation To assign an {ATD INTRUSION} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} +[PGM] + [86] + [SAVE] To activate attendant intrusion while receiving busy on an Intercom call: Press {ATD INTRUSION} flexible button. Intrusion Warning Tone is provided to the busy station, then a three-way conference is setup. Conditions» If an Attendant presses the {ATD INTRUSION} flexible button while receiving DND tone, the system will activate DND Override.» The conditions of the Conference feature apply. LCD Display Format Control Description The System Attendant can select the format of the time and date provided to the LCD of all IP Keysets in the system. The System Attendant can select (toggle between) two formats for both time and date. The formats are: Date: Month/date/year or Year/month/date Time: 12-hour or 24-hour (military) Any station user can select (toggle between) two formats for the language to be displayed on the station s LCD. The two formats are: English Another language, if a second language has been selected in PGM 169, Btn 3 programming.

64 2-38 Attendant Features Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To Change LCD Date Format (toggle): 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Date Display Format program code [042]. To Change LCD Time Format (toggle): 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Time Display Format program code [043]. STATION USER To Change Language Format (toggle) 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the language Display Format program code [71] to toggle between English and a second language that has been selected in PGM 169, Btn 3 programming. Conditions» The formats can also be changed in Admin programming. Related Features Attendant Positions - page 2-11 Hardware IP Keyset

65 Attendant Features 2-39 Push-To-Talk Paging Description Each IP Keyset can be assigned as a member of one or more of the system's nine Push-To-Talk page groups. The IP Keyset user may log-in or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which it is assigned. Once logged in, the user may place or receive one-way page announcements to/from other users who are logged in to the same PTT group. To place a PTT page announcement, the user must press and hold the {PTT} Flex button. An Attendant may log other stations in and out of PTT groups. Operation IP Keyset To assign a {PTT} Flex button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] [SAVE] To log-in to a PTT group: 1. Dial [#0], the PTT Log-in/out code. 2. Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 and 0 for all groups). To log-out of the PTT group(s): 1. Dial [#0], the PTT Log-in/out code. 2. Dial [*]. To place a page to the active PTT group: 1. Press and hold the {PTT} Flex button. 2. After confirmation tone make page announcement. ATTENDANT To log other stations in to a PTT group: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial [077], the Attendant PTT log-in/out code. 3. Dial the desired station range. 4. Dial the PTT group number (1-9 and 0 for all groups). 5. Press [SAVE]. To log other stations out of a PTT group: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial [077], the Attendant PTT log-in/out code. 3. Dial the desired station range. 4. Dial [*]. 5. Press [SAVE].

66 2-40 Attendant Features Conditions» Conditions associated with Internal/External & All Call Page apply to Push to Talk paging.» To access PTT paging, the station must be permitted access to system paging, PGM 111, Btn 7.» If allowed access to all PTT groups, a station may log-into all groups (PTT group 0) to place announcements to all groups simultaneously and receive announcements from any group.» A station can only log-in to PTT groups to which it is assigned as a member.» The station must have a {PTT} button to place or receive PTT announcements. The WiFi phone has a fixed PTT button.» The station may be assigned and logged in to the default active PTT group in the system database. Related Features Paging Hardware IP Keyset System Clock Set Description The System Attendant can set the system Time/Date. Operation To set the system clock: 1. Press [PGM]. PGM LED flashes and [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [041]. 3. Dial six digits for Date (MM/DD/YY) or press [SAVE] to skip Date setup. 4. Dial four digits for Time (HH/MM) or press [SAVE] to skip Time setup. 5. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and Attendant station goes to idle status automatically. Conditions» The time is entered in a 24-hour (military) format. Related Features Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode SMDR - page 2-194

67 Attendant Features 2-41 Traffic Analysis - Overview Description The system will monitor, store, and output various traffic statistics for system resources. Output can be provided periodically or upon request. The output can be used to: Monitor and evaluate system performance. Observe usage trends and recommend possible corrective actions, as needed. Determine possible trunk problems (e.g., blocking level too high). Justify system updates and upgrades, when appropriate. The System Attendant can enable Periodic Reporting. Once enabled, the system will continue to monitor and output the requested report until canceled. On demand reports selected by the System Attendant are output upon request once. The Traffic Report is collected and sent to the defined RS-232C port. System resources covered by the Traffic Reports are: - Attendant Traffic Report - Auto Attendant Traffic Report - Call Hourly & Total Report - H/W Unit Usage Summary Report - CO Traffic Peak & Hourly Report - IP Call Traffic Report Individual Traffic Reports cover one of five Analysis Periods. Table 2-1: Analysis Period Codes 1 = Today's peak activity hour (during the last 24 hours) 2 = Yesterday's peak activity hour (during 24 hours previous to today s period) 3 = Last hour activity 4 = Today's total activity 5 = Yesterday's total activity

68 2-42 Attendant Features Traffic Analysis - All Summary Reports Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print All Summary Traffic Reports: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0121]. 3. Select an Analysis period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE]. To print All Summary Traffic Reports periodically: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Program dial code [0122]. 3. Select an Analysis period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Select the hour the output is desired. 5. Press [SAVE]. To cancel periodic print All Summary Traffic Reports: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0123]. 3. Press [SAVE]. Conditions» The Print All Summary Traffic Reports request [0121] generates the Attendant Traffic, Auto Attendant Traffic, Call Summary, H/W Usage, and CO/IP Traffic Summary reports. Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data

69 Attendant Features 2-43 Traffic Analysis - Attendant Traffic Report Description Attendant Traffic Report -- This report covers Attendant s service with statistics for all Attendants. The following Table describes the report fields. Attribute Analysis Start Hour Attendant Number Total Calls Calls Answered Calls Lost Calls Held-Lost Calls Held Time Available Time Talk Time Held Time No Answer Speed of Answer Type Description The starting time (24-hour clock) for the Analysis Period. The station number of Attendant. The total number incoming calls except CO/IP Ring Group ring & Hold Recall ring. The number of calls answered by all active Attendant during the Analysis Period. The number of calls offered to active Attendant that disconnect before answer. Calls, which disconnect while on hold, are not considered Lost for this report. The number of calls placed on hold by the active Attendant that disconnect while on hold. The Calls Held-Lost includes calls which time out and recall the Attendants. The number of calls that are answered by the Attendants, and subsequently placed on hold by the Attendants. The time during which the Attendant is not talking on calls but are available to handle new calls (minutes). The total time, during the Analysis Period, the Attendant was active or talking on a CO/IP (minutes). Talk time does not include ring duration. The total amount of time (seconds) that the Attendant has calls on hold. The average amount of time that calls spend in queue and/ or ring at the Attendant before the call is Lost (secs). The average elapsed time from the Attendant terminating one call and answering the next Type of Attendant (system, main)

70 2-44 Attendant Features Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print the Attendant Traffic Report: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0124]. 3. Select an Analysis Period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE]. Conditions» A peak hour is the hour when a system has the most call volume. Related Features ACD Agent Reports - page 2-58 SMDR - page Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data. Traffic Analysis - Auto Attendant Traffic Report This report provides call handling statistics for the VSF Auto Attendant. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print the Auto Attendant Traffic Report on demand: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0125]. 3. Select an Analysis Period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE]. Conditions» A peak hour is the hour when a system has the most call volume. Related Features ACD Agent Reports - page 2-58 SMDR - page Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data.

71 Attendant Features 2-45 Traffic Analysis - Call Hourly and Call Summary Reports Description Call activity statistics are provided in Call Hourly and Call Summary Reports. Call Hourly Report This report covers hourly & total completed call activity for the select Analysis Period. Call Summary Report This report covers call activity totals for all Analysis Periods. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print the Call Activity Reports: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0126]. 3. Select an Analysis Period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE]. Related Features ACD Agent Reports -page 2-58 SMDR - page Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data.

72 2-46 Attendant Features Traffic Analysis H/W Unit Usage Summary Report Description This report covers usage statistics for Hardware (H/W) resources. The following Table describes the report fields. Type Attribute Number of Unit Analysis Start Hour Total Requests Total Denied The type of Hardware resource Description The total number of installed Hardware resources of this type. The starting time (using 24-hour clock) of the last hour or the hour with the highest Peak usage. The system-wide total number of usage requests during the listed hour. The total number of requests is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request. The system-wide total number of requests that were denied because no Hardware resource was available during the listed hour. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print the H/W Unit Usage Summary Report: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0127]. 3. Select an Analysis Period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE]. Related Features ACD Agent Reports - page 2-58 SMDR - page Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data

73 Attendant Features 2-47 Traffic Analysis CO/IP Grp Summary & Hourly Reports Description This report provides summary peak CO/IP Group activity statistics grouped on an hourly basis for the select analysis period. The following Table describes the report fields. Attribute Peak Hour for the CO Group Number of COs Total Usage Total Attempts Incoming Attempts Outgoing Attempts Group ATB (All Trunks Busy) Percentage All COs Busy Percentage Fail to Attempt Outgoing Description The hour during the today that has the largest total usage for the CO Group. The number of COs in the CO group. Total usage (in minutes) for all COs in the CO group. Represents the total time the CO/IP are busy (with calls) during the one-hour measurement period. Total usage measures each time a CO/IP is seized for use by an incoming call (whether it is picked up or not) or an outgoing call (only after digits have been dialed). The number of incoming and outgoing attempts carried on the CO group. The number of incoming attempts carried on the CO group. The number of outgoing attempts carried on the CO group. The number of calls offered to a CO group that all trunks are busy in the group Calls rejected for authorization reasons are not included. The percentage of time that all COs in the CO group were simultaneously in use during the measurement interval. The percentage of offered calls that are not carried on the CO group. It does not include unauthorized calls that are denied service on the CO group (due to restrictions) or calls that are carried on the CO group but do not successfully complete at the far end (that is, where there is no answer). Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To print the CO Group Summary Report: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0128]. 3. Select an Analysis Period (1-5). Refer to Table 2-1 on page Press [SAVE].

74 2-48 Attendant Features To print the CO Group Hourly Report: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0129]. 3. Enter CO Group Number. Related Features ACD Agent Reports - page 2-58 SMDR - page Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data. Voice Store & Forward (VSF) Description The Voice Store & Forward (VSF) module provides the hardware and software to record voice to memory and forward the voice to the appropriate terminal. System prompts, date, time, etc. are stored in the VSF in several languages. The system selects the language to be used based on the "Country Code" assigned in the system database. AUTO ATTENDANT ANNOUNCEMENTS Description Up to 20 Auto Attendant announcements can be recorded and stored in the VSF. These announcements can be used as Station Group announcements and/or with the CCR (Caller Controlled Routing) Audio Text Tables. The announcements may request the user dial an extension number or, if programmed, a digit for CCR defined in the Audio Text tables.» Only the System Attendant may record VSF AA announcements. Operation SYSTEM ATTENDANT To record a VSF AA announcements while idle: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Lift the station handset. 3. Dial the Attendant Station Program code for AA recording [06]. 4. Dial the desired VSF AA announcement number (01-20), the current announcement is played followed by the prompt "Press the pound button to record".

75 Attendant Features Dial [#]. The prompt plays "Record your message" and a beep tone is provided. Start recording using the Mic/Handset. 6. When the announcement recording is complete, press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and you can record another announcement. To delete system announcements at Attendant station: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code for AA recording [06]. 3. Dial the desired announcement number (01-20). The current announcement, if any, is played. 4. Press [SPEED] during playback to delete the announcement. Confirmation tone sounds. Conditions» There are no individual time limits for the AA announcements. However, the system VSF has a maximum storage capacity of 120 minutes.» If the VSF is not installed, it is not possible to record AA announcements and such attempts will produce an error tone.» If, during recording of an announcement, the user returns to idle (goes on-hook) without saving the announcement, the new recording is discarded.» To record or delete, all the VSF ports must be idle, otherwise a busy tone sounds.» External callers to the system will hears Ring Back Tone the system answers the call and the VSF AA announcement is started.» Up to 500 VSF announcements can be recorded including User greetings and the 20 VSF AA announcements.» If the VSF memory reaches full capacity while recording, the recording up to the memory-full state is saved. Related Features Auto Attendant Transfer - page 2-51 Automatic Call Distribution - page 2-56 Caller Controlled Routing - page 2-50 Remote Message Retrieval - page Station Groups - page Hardware VSF

76 2-50 Attendant Features CALLER CONTROLLED ROUTING Description When a call comes into the system through a DID or DISA line, the external user may receive a recorded Voice Store & Forward Auto Attendant (VSF AA) announcement. By pressing one digit, a user may access a station, station group, Speed Bin, Page Zone, other destination, or another level of the Caller Controlled Routing (CCR) Audio Text table. The Auto Attendant monitors digits dialed by the caller as input for routing instructions. The system routes the call based on the CCR Audio Text Table instructions for the received digit. The caller can route through a multi-level Audio Text Table of up to 20 levels or multiple smaller Tables may be defined. Operation To activate CCR after the VSF AA announcement is played to the caller: 1. Caller dials a digit to select the desired routing option. The system waits the period of time set on the CCR Analysis Timer for possible additional station number digits. 2. At the expiration of the CCR Analysis Timer setting, the call is routed as defined in the CCR Audio Text Table. Conditions» The external user may dial any time during a VSF Auto Attendant announcement and must dial prior to expiration of the CCR Analysis Timer.» If the external caller dials more than a single digit, the call is routed based on the Telenium IP System numbering plan.» If the external caller dials an invalid selection, the system will play the "Invalid Entry" prompt to external caller.» Calls answered by a VSF Auto Attendant announcement and subject to a CCR Audio Text Table routing are interactive DISA calls. These calls are subject to the conditions of the DISA feature.» The CCR feature is supported only for DID or DISA calls.» If the external caller dials [ ], the current VSF announcement is repeated.» The CCR Audio Text Table can be programmed to disconnect the caller after the VSF Auto Attendant announcement. Related Features Direct Inward System Access - page Hardware VSF

77 Attendant Features 2-51 AUTO ATTENDANT TRANSFER Description The Auto Attendant can request the incoming caller to dial a station, dial [#] to access the caller s mailbox, or dial a single digit for automated routing based on CCR Audio Text Tables. When the caller dials a station number, the Auto Attendant stores the digits until the station number is complete. Using the station number dialed, the Auto Attendant will complete an unsupervised transfer to the dialed station number. Operation Auto Attendant Transfer operation is automatic when digits are received from caller. Conditions» At the entry-level, the caller must begin dialing within the Dial tone timer and subsequent digits must be dialed within the Inter-Digit Timer.» If the station number dialed is not recognized, the "Invalid Entry" prompt is played.» When the DISA Retry Count limit is reached, the call is sent to the Attendant. Related Features Caller Controlled Routing - page 2-50 Hardware VSF

78 2-52 Auto Call Release Auto Call Release Description Uncompleted calls, CO, IP or intercom (except Handsfree Answerback), will be released automatically after a predetermined time. Operation Auto Call Release of Intercom calls: If a Station places an intercom call, and the called station/facility does not answer prior to expiration of the Intercom Call Automatic Release Timer, the intercom call is terminated and the calling station receives an error tone or, for on-hook dialing, receives an error tone for one second and returns to idle. Auto Call Release of CO/IP calls: If a station seizes an idle CO/IP line and no digits are dialed prior to expiration of the CO/IP Call Automatic Call Release Timer, the call is released and the station receives an error tone or, for on-hook dialing, receives error tone for one second and returns to idle. Conditions» If Automatic Call Release timer is set to 0, Auto Call Release is disabled.» When the handset is used, and the timer expires, the call attempt is cancelled and the station receives error tone for 30 seconds followed by howling-tone for 30 seconds, if programmed. While in this state, the system marks the station in a fault mode.

79 Auto Called Number Redial 2-53 Auto Called Number Redial Description The Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR) feature allows a station user to request and have the system retry a busy or no answer external call until the call is connected or the feature is cancelled. Operation To activate ACNR while receiving busy or no answer: 1. Press [REDIAL]. 2. Hang up handset or press [SPEAKER]. The system initiates the ACNR process, starting the ACNR Pause Timer. - At expiration of the timer, system activates the station s speakerphone with the microphone in the mute mode. - The system attempts the previous call. - When the called party answers, the user may answer by lifting the handset or pressing [MUTE] to communicate with called party. At Retry Counter: ACNR is deactivated automatically when ACNR retry counter expires. To cancel ACNR while idle: Press flashing [REDIAL]. To cancel ACNR during an ACNR attempt: Lift the handset or press the [MUTE] or flashing [REDIAL].

80 2-54 Auto Called Number Redial Conditions» Three timers and a retry counter can be programmed. ACNR Pause Timer ACNR Delay Timer ACNR Tone Detect Timer ACNR Retry Counter This timer is activated between ACNR retries. When expired, the system attempts the call. When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no available path for the call, the Delay Timer is initiated. At expiration, ACNR is activated. This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO/IP party as busy if the System cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires. This counter is decreased every time station retries ACNR. ACNR is canceled if this counter is set to 0.» The call will be placed on the same path as originally used. If the path is busy, an available CO/IP line in the same group will be seized.» The ACNR Retry Counter is decremented by one when the system completes the dialed number.» When ACNR Pause Timer expires, if the station is in busy state, the ACNR Delay Timer is invoked.» Upon completion of dialing, the system will monitor the circuit for progress tone from CO or WAN. Related Features Last Number Redial - page Mute - page Speakerphone - page Hardware IP Keyset

81 Auto Release of Speaker 2-55 Auto Release of Speaker Description After completion of the use of certain features, the [SPEAKER] is turned off automatically and the IP Keyset returns to idle. Operation Auto Release of Speaker operation is automatic for supported features. Conditions» This feature applies to all User and Attendant Programming except Custom Message, CO/IP line Disable and Version Display. Auto Release of [SPEAKER] also applies to features including Call Park, Call Back, Call Forward, CO/IP Queuing.» If erroneous data is entered during User Programming, an error tone sounds and the user must correct the error before the station will return to idle automatically. Hardware IP Keyset

82 2-56 Automatic Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution Description Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) provides enhanced incoming call routing capabilities. ACD routing employs a Uniform Call Distribution, adding ACD statistics reporting and ACD Supervisor to monitor and assist agents and affect alternate routing. Features of the ACD function are described in the following paragraphs. VSF ANNOUNCEMENT VSF announcements can be assigned to provide different messages to each ACD group. The system ACD groups can be programmed to provide announcements to incoming calls when all group members are busy. Both primary and secondary announcements are available. If desired, the primary message can be defined so as to play in full to all callers, a guaranteed announcement. AGENTS Agent Help Request The HELP feature provides a means for an ACD Agent to signal their assigned supervisor for assistance. The Agent, while on a call, can press the {HELP} flexible button or dial the ACD Help code [574] to signal the assigned Supervisor. The Supervisor may respond by use of their {ACD HELP RESPONSE} flexible button. Call Queue Status ACD agents can view the call queue status for the ACD group using the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} flexible button. Status information includes the number of calls in queue and the longest queue time. {ON/OFF DUTY} Control This allows ACD agents to go On/Off duty at their phone. SUPERVISOR Supervisor Login/Logout - The login/logout feature provides a means for a Supervisor to log into one of the ACD groups. This feature allows a Supervisor to log into any ACD Group from any station in the system. Supervisor Monitor The supervisor monitor provides a means for an ACD supervisor to monitor an agent s call in progress or to provide assistance. A supervisor can intrude into an agent s call in a listen-only mode or in a true conference mode. This feature is available with or without warning tone. Reroute Queued Call The supervisor can reroute a queued call to another destination with or without answering the call.

83 Automatic Call Distribution 2-57 Supervisor Status This allows ACD supervisors to view the status of each of the 40 ACD groups in the system on an individual basis. This display will give the status of the ACD group requested at the time either the code is dialed or the flexible button is pressed. The display shows if the agent is Out Of Service, in DND, or busy on a call. The Supervisor can use this display to recognize that there are a lot of queued calls in a specific group, so that the supervisor can then take steps to remedy the problem. ACD Group Parameters The supervisor can change the overflow destination, overflow time, and wrap-up time defined for an ACD group. QUEUED CALL DISPLAY ON LCD When a call is queued to a group, the ACD Supervisor is notified in real-time by the LED of the {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button. The {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button allows access to the Queue Call Display, which includes display of the following statistics: - Number of calls in queue - Queued time for the longest queue - Agents in service (i.e., not in DND, Log-Off, or Out Of Service) ALTERNATE ACD DESTINATION Alternate ACD Destination can be a station or a group. The ACD group can be programmed so that incoming calls are sent to the Alternate destination if all ACD stations in the group are busy. OVERFLOW STATION/GROUP ASSIGNMENT An overflow station/group may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station/group after a specified time. The overflow station may not be one of the overflowing ACD group stations. ACD STATISTICS REPORT ACD reports can be requested by the Supervisor and can be programmed for periodic output over the SMDR port. The system will provide traffic and on-line status reports for group and agent statistics as follows: ACD Group Statistics Report: - Group number - Print time stamp - Total calls - Number of unanswered calls - Average queue time - Longest queue time - Total number of calls placed in queue

84 2-58 Automatic Call Distribution - Number of times calls experience all agents busy - Total time all agents were busy - Average ring time before answer - Average service time after answer Agent Statistics Report: Group Number Agent Number - Number of ACD calls served - Number of unanswered ACD calls - Average ring time before answer - Average ACD call service time after answer SUPERVISOR STATUS The {SUPERVISOR STATUS} flexible button gives the Supervisor access to the Supervisor Status & Control Menu. The LED of the button indicates when calls have been queued to the ACD group. The Status & Control Menu is shown in the IP Keyset display: 1(Status)/2(Dbase)/3(Agent)/#(Print) Selections from the Supervisor menu are: 1 - to receive the queued ACD call display 2 - to access the ACD routing database 3 - for agent status and control # - to request output of ACD statistics to SMDR port The Status menu item, selection 1, will return the Queued Call Display to the Supervisor s position. The Dbase menu item, selection 2, is used by the Supervisor to select and modify the Overflow destination, Overflow timer, and the Wrap-Up timer. The Agent menu item, selection 3, is used by the supervisor to view the agent status, place individual agents in On/Off Duty mode, and request output of Agent Statistics Report. The Print menu, selection #, is used to output the ACD Group Statistics Report (refer to "ACD Group Statistics Report:" on page 2-57 for contents of the report).

85 Automatic Call Distribution 2-59 Operation AGENT To assign Agent Flexible Buttons: {ACD AGENT PRIMARY LOGIN} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [581] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD AGENT PRIMARY LOGOUT} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [582] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD AGENT SECONDARY LOGIN} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [583] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD AGENT SECONDARY LOGOUT} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [584] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD AGENT WRAP-UP END} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [585] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [575] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {HELP} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [574] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ON/OFF DUTY} button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [571] + ACD Group number + Reason Code (#, *, 0, or 1-9) + [SAVE] Reason Codes: # = Wrap-up End 0 = Reset Wrap-up Timer / Temporary Off Duty * & 1-9 = Continuous Off Duty (meanings defined by the system administrator) To toggle Agent Duty status: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Agent On/Off Duty code [571], dial the ACD Group number, and dial a reason code (#, *, 0, or 1-9). -or- Press the {ON/OFF DUTY} flexible button. To display the ACD call queue status: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the ACD call queue status code [575] and dial the desired ACD Group number. -or-

86 2-60 Automatic Call Distribution Press the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} flexible button. To request Supervisor assistance: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Agent Help code [574] and dial the ACD Group number. -or- Press the {HELP} flexible button. SUPERVISOR To assign Supervisor Flexible Buttons: {SUPERVISOR LOG IN} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [572] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {SUPERVISOR LOG OUT} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [573] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {SUPERVISOR STATUS} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [576] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD HELP RESPONSE} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [574] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [577] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD REROUTE QCALL ANS} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [578] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] {ACD REROUTE QCALL NO ANS} flexible button [PGM] + {FLEX} + [579] + ACD Group number + [SAVE] To Log In/Out: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Log In or Log Out code [572]/[573]. 3. Dial the desired ACD group number. -or- Press the {SUPERVISOR LOG IN/OUT} flexible button. To monitor a busy Agent Conversation: 1. Call busy agent. 2. Press {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button. Supervisor is connected to agent call with Microphone muted and [MUTE] LED is On. 3. Press [MUTE] to enter the agent s conversation.

87 Automatic Call Distribution 2-61 To assist an agent that has requested Supervisor {HELP}: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the flashing {ACD HELP RESPONSE} flexible button, Supervisor connected to agent call with Microphone muted, the [MUTE] LED is On. 3. To enter the agent conversation, press the [MUTE] key. To answer queued calls, oldest first (Answer Reroute): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. When a call is queued to the ACD group the LED of the {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button flashes. Dial the Supervisor Answer reroute code [578]. -or- Press the {ACD REROUTE QCALL ANS} flexible button. The oldest queued call is answered by the supervisor. To send queued calls to another destination (No Answer Reroute): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. When a call is queued to the ACD group the LED of the {ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR} flexible button flashes. Dial the No Answer Reroute code [579]. 3. Dial the destination number or press a {DSS} flexible button. The oldest queued ACD call is rerouted to the destination. -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {ACD REROUTE QCALL NO ANS} flexible button. The oldest queued ACD call is rerouted to the destination. To use the Supervisor Status Menu: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {SUPERVISOR STATUS} flexible button. The following menu appears: 1(Status)/2(Dbase)/3(Agent)/#(Print) For ACD call queue status display: Dial [1]. LCD shows queued call statistics for the selected ACD Group: - The number of calls in queue - The queued time for the call queued longest - The number of agents in service

88 2-62 Automatic Call Distribution For access to the ACD Routing Database: 1. Dial ACD Dbase Code [2]. 2. Select database item scrolling with the [Vol Up] or [Vol Down] buttons: - Overflow Destination- station/group - Overflow Time- xxx seconds - Wrap-Up Time- xxx seconds 3. Enter new data. 4. Press [SAVE].

89 Automatic Call Distribution 2-63 For Agent Status and Control: 1. Dial Agent Duty Code [3]. The LCD menu updates: 1(Status)/2(On/Off )/#(Print) 2. Dial Agent Status Code [1]. AgentXXX TOTAL : XXX 3. Press [ ] for a next agent selection. 4. Press [Vol Up] or [Vol Down] key for: - Number of ACD calls served - Number of unanswered ACD calls - Average ring time before answer - Average ACD call service time after answer To change the On/Off Duty status remotely: 1. Dial ACD Agent Duty feature code [3]. 2. Press [ ] for a next agent selection. 3. Dial [0] or [1]. ([0]: Off Duty, [1]: On Duty). To print ACD Statistics: 1. Dial ACD Statistics Reporting Code [#]. 2. Press the [MUTE] to initialize the stored database, this eliminates overlap of future reports.

90 2-64 Automatic Call Distribution Conditions» An agent in DND is off-duty and incoming ACD calls will bypass the agent. The supervisor can deactivate DND at an agent using the On/Off duty procedure.» The {ACD CALLS IN QUEUE} flexible button LED indicates incoming CO/IP calls in queue. It flashes at 240 ipm.» If an agent becomes available during an announcement, except a guaranteed announcement, the call will be passed immediately to the agent.» After completion of a call, an agent will be maintained as busy (unavailable) to incoming ACD calls for a minimum of two seconds and a maximum of the assigned wrap-up time. During this time, the supervisor's LED for the agent will flash at the DND rate and the supervisor may call the station.» A guaranteed announcement is obtained by assigning 0 seconds to the first announcement.» Each agent can have a different priority. The system will route calls to the agent with the highest priority, which has been idle the longest.» The information for the calls routed to an ACD group is saved in the ACD status data.» The ACD status can be printed periodically. The period to print is assigned in Admin programming. The ACD records contain information for both ACD agents and ACD group.» An Intrusion tone may be provided to the agent s call when a Supervisor "Monitors" or Assists the agent.» A station can only be logged in as a Supervisor to one ACD group. Logging into another group automatically logs the station out of Supervisor status of any other group.» Upon login, a Supervisor will be placed in the wrap-up mode prior to receiving ACD group calls. Related Features Station Groups VSF, Auto Attendant Announcements

91 Automatic Call Distribution 2-65 ACD Agent Unavailable & Reason Codes Description Agents can enter the unavailable status by entering the Agent Unavailable code (Default is 571) and the ACD group number. The agents must enter an additional digit to identify the specific reason for the unavailable status. The agent may dial a digit "1-9" to identify an unavailable reason to the Discovery Manager application. Digits 1-9 are programmable in the Discovery Manager program, in that they can be assigned a specific unavailable reason there. The meanings for use of digits "0", "*", and "#" are fixed, and reasons are not programmable in the Discovery Manager program. Operation To activate Unavailable status at an idle station: 1. Dial the Unavailable code and ACD group number or press the Unavailable Flex button ("571" + ACD Group number). 2. Dial an unavailable reason code "1-9". The station is placed in unavailable status. To activate Permanent Unavailable status: 1. Dial the Unavailable code and ACD group number or press the Unavailable Flex button ("571" + ACD Group number). 2. Dial the code "*" or "#". The station is placed in Permanent Unavailable status. To return to available status from Unavailable permanent status: Dial the Unavailable code and ACD group number or press the Unavailable Flex button. The station is placed in available status. To extend the wrap-up time: 1. Dial the Unavailable code and ACD group number or press the Unavailable Flex button ("571" + ACD Group number). 2. Dial the code "0" to extend wrap-up (reset the wrap-up timer). To make an agent immediately available to take a call: Dial the Wrap-up End code and ACD group number or press the Wrap-up End Flex button ("585" + ACD Group number).

92 2-66 Automatic Call Distribution Conditions» The system will provide a unique event to the Discovery Manager application for Unavailable button activations/depressions.» The Unavailable Flex button will flash while in agent unavailable status.» Unavailable code meanings must be defined by the Administrator of the Discovery Manager application. Related Features Wrap-Up Hardware IP Keyset

93 Automatic Call Distribution 2-67 ACD Group Agent Login/Logout Description ACD group members must be assigned to the group using a 4-digit Agent ID number. This number can be the same as the station number or any number By using the Agent ID number, an ACD Agent can login and logout of the associated ACD group from any station in the system. Unique Agent IDs must be assigned for each agent of the ACD group. Operation To Login to an ACD Group: 1. Dial the ACD Login Code or press the Login Flex button. 581 = Primary ACD Login Code 583 = Secondary Login Code 2. Dial the ACD group number. 3. Dial the Agent ID. The agent is logged into the ACD group. To Logout of an ACD Group: 1. Dial the Logout Code or press the Logout Flex button. 582 = Primary ACD Logout Code 584 = Secondary Logout Code 2. Dial the ACD group number. 3. Dial the Agent ID. The agent is logged out of the ACD Group. Conditions» All Login/Logout events are passed to the Discovery Manager reporting package.» The Telenium IP system does not verify the agent ID codes. It just requires that four digits be entered.» A station can be assigned to more than one group. Related Features Station Groups

94 2-68 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Caller Entered Caller ID Description ACD Groups can be assigned to automatically answer incoming calls and play a user recorded message. The message can be "guaranteed", meaning it will be played in full before the call is routed further. With a Guaranteed Message and ACD Group ICLID routing enabled, callers can be requested to input an identification, which will be used in place of any received ICLID. The ICLID route table is then used to further route the call. The caller can terminate the announcement by dialing [#] and the call is routed based on the received or caller input. Operation Operation of this feature is automatic based on caller input. Conditions» The caller may correct an entry by dialing [*] and dialing a new number.» If the caller input does not match a table entry, the call is routed by original ACD routing rules as if the guaranteed message is complete.» If there is no caller input when the caller dials [#] or the Guaranteed Message is complete, the call is routed by original ACD routing rules. ACD Group Call Pick-Up Description Calls to an ACD Group can be answered using Group Call Pick-Up. Operation To pick-up a call ringing at the ACD Group: 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial [566], the Group Call Pick-Up code. The call is connected. Conditions» To pick-up a CO/IP call the station must have an idle appearance button available.» When several calls are ringing, Call Pick-Up will connect the oldest call with the highest priority (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).» When a station belongs to multiple station groups and calls are ringing at more than one of the groups, calls will be answered from the lowest to highest Station Group Number (620 to 659).

95 Automatic Call Distribution 2-69 ACD Group Calls In Queue Display Description ACD Agents Supervisors using a Telenium IP display phone will automatically receive the CIQ (Calls In Queue) display for the associated ACD Group. The display is updated whenever a call is queued to or queued out from the associated ACD group. Without update of CIQ status, the LCD is also updated automatically at a rate of programmed time. Operation LCD Display: Idle Mode Display 621 CIQ XX AGENT XX OLDEST CALL HH:MM:SS 1st line: ACD Group Number, CIQ (Calls In Queue), Number of active Agents 2nd line: Queue time of Oldest Call In Queue, shown in minutes and seconds (updated in real time). Busy Mode Display 621 CIQ XX AG XX OC XXX LINE HH:MM 1st line: ACD Group Number, CIQ (Calls In Queue), Number of active Agents, Queue time of Oldest Call In Queue, shown in minutes and seconds. 2nd line: Active Call and Duration. LCD Update: Whenever CIQ status is updated (queued to, or out), LCD display is updated. Without CIQ status update, LCD display timer works and LCD is updated automatically. Conditions» Idle mode display is shown to assigned agents when idle or on an ICM call.» Other displays may overwrite the CIQ display.» The CIQ display is enabled/disabled in Admin programming.» The CIQ display is updated whenever CIQ status is updated and also at a rate of seconds programmed by Admin.» If there is no CIQ, the display returns to the previous display.

96 2-70 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Calls in Queue Message Description Callers to an ACD group may receive the Calls In Queue display "You are xx in queue" and listen to "Your Call is number xx in Queue" (where xx is the number of Calls In Queue). The caller may be allowed to dial digits to exit the queue and be routed to another station, station group or Voice Mail, external user, and networking station up to 10 tables. Operation Operation is automatic when programmed. Conditions» The message can be played at time of queue, after any 1st announcement.» A CIQ reroute Table can be programmed for each ACD Group. Related Features Station Groups ACD Group Calls In Queue Page Alert Description The administrator can establish Calls In Queue thresholds which, when exceeded, will cause the system to have a system recorded announcement played over a programmed paging zone. The message can be delayed or immediate and may be repeated at defined intervals. Different treatment and messages can be established for up to three different Calls In Queue thresholds. Operation When Calls are queued to an ACD group and the number of Calls exceeds a threshold, a user-recorded system announcement is played after a few delay seconds. When the announcement ends, it is repeated after the programmed interval until the CIQ goes out of the threshold range (either goes below the threshold or attains a higher threshold level). As Calls In Queue increase or decrease, the system automatically plays the CIQ announcement for the appropriate threshold, and the announcement is repeated until the CIQ alert level is changed by the threshold check.

97 Automatic Call Distribution 2-71 Conditions» The Administrator must record the CIQ threshold alert voice message and must properly assign the value of threshold, announcement message number, and paging zone.» Threshold assignment values must be sequentially ascending for the feature to work properly. Threshold assignment value examples: Threshold 4, 3, 2 - the first threshold 4 only available Threshold 4, 3, 8 - the first and third threshold 4 & 8 are available Threshold 4, all thresholds are available (the second one has more calls in queue than the first one and the third one has more calls in queue than the second one)» The VSF will connect and play the appropriate announcement. External mail systems may require a CTI-type message. ACD Group Mailbox Description Calls to an ACD Group can be programmed to overflow or otherwise be rerouted to Voice Mail. When routed to Voice Mail, messages will be placed in the ACD Group mailbox using the ACD Group number. Messages are retrieved in the same manner as normal voice messages employing the ACD Group number in place of the station number. Operation How to leave a message on ACD Group mailbox: ACD group has an incoming call, but the call overflows to Voice Mail Group. At this time, the caller s voice message will be left at the destination established in Admin programming (Mailbox Wait Station - PGM 191, Btn 24). To retrieve this ACD Mailbox, press {ACD GROUP MAILBOX} button, which is programmed for Station Mailbox on VSF-VM group, and dial the ACD group number and ACD Mailbox Password.

98 2-72 Automatic Call Distribution Example: The overflow destination of ACD Group 620 is VSF-VM group 621. ACD Group 620 Agents are station 100, 101. The ACD Group Mailbox Wait Station is 106. If a call overflows or routes to the VSF-VM group, the voice message is left on Station 106. To retrieve this message, the agent station uses a {ACD GROUP MAILBOX} button. To make this button, press [PGM] + {flexible button} (VSF- VM group number) (Mailbox Wait Station) + [SAVE]. After the {ACD GROUP MAILBOX} button is pressed, dial the ACD group member, and after the prompt enter the ACD Mailbox password. The message will be played. Conditions» System Administrator may change the ACD Group Mailbox password. Or Supervisor may change the password with ACD status button.» ACD Mailbox Messages cannot be retrieved by an external caller; they can only be retrieved by internal station users. Related Features Station Groups Voice Mail Hardware VSF, PathFinder IP, or Adjunct Voice Mail system ACD Group Multiple Supervisor Description The Telenium IP will permit up to five supervisors per ACD group. These supervisors are only allowed to be a supervisor in the one group to which they are assigned. In addition, one supervisor per system can monitor two or more ACD groups. This supervisor can create a "group status" button for each group. If supervisor activity for the group is detected, the button will flash and the supervisor can view the information. This alleviates the supervisor from being inundated with information.

99 Automatic Call Distribution 2-73 ACD Group Name Description A name can be assigned to each ACD Group. The name can be up to 12 characters. The name displays on the LCDs of ACD Agents when calls are presented to the group. Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed. Conditions» Group name is printed in the Statistic information. ACD Group Supervisor Login/Logout Description The supervisor login/logout feature provides a means for a supervisor to log into one of the ACD groups and monitor calls. Operation To Login: 1. Dial [572] (the ACD supervisor login code) or press the {SUPERVISOR LOGIN} Flex button. 2. Dial the ACD group number. 3. Dial supervisor ID code ( ). To Logout: 1. Dial [573] (the ACD supervisor logout code) or press the {SUPERVISOR LOGOUT} Flex button. 2. Dial the ACD group number. 3. Dial supervisor ID code ( ). Conditions» All Login/Logout events are passed to the Discovery Manager reporting package.» The Telenium IP system does not verify the supervisor ID codes. It just requires that four digits be entered.

100 2-74 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Wrap-up Button Description A Flex button can be assigned as a "Wrap-up" button, which will activate or deactivate the Wrap-up status of the agent. If the button is pressed with the agent in the idle and available state, the agent will be placed in the Wrap-up mode for the Wrap-up timer duration. Operation To make an ACD Wrap-up button: Press [PGM] + {Flexible button} + "ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty code (571)" + ACD Group number + "0" + [SAVE] To activate Wrap-up status at a station: Press the Wrap-up Flex button. -or- Dial "ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty code (571)" + ACD group number + "0". The station is placed in Wrap-up status for Wrap-up timer duration. To return to available status from Wrap-up status: Press the Wrap-up Flex button. The station is placed in available status. Conditions» The system will output a unique event to the Discovery Manager application for a Wrap button activation/depression.» The button type "Wrap" will printout as part of the station printout area.» The Wrap-up Flex button will flash when in wrap mode. The default time for the Wrap-up timer is 10 seconds.» The Wrap-up Flex button is assigned as an Agent Unavailable button (Default is 571) with the Unavailable Reason Code 0. Related Features ACD Group Agent Unavailable & Reason Codes

101 Automatic Call Distribution 2-75 ACD Group Wrap-up End Button Description A Flex button can be assigned as a "Wrap-up End" button, which will deactivate the Wrap-up status of the agent. If the agent is in the Wrap-up mode, when this button is pressed the station is placed in the available state and the "Wrap-up" timer reset. Operation To make an ACD Wrap-up End button: Press [PGM] + {Flexible button} + "ACD Wrap-up End code (585)" + ACD Group number + [SAVE] -or- Press [PGM] + {Flexible button} + "ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty code (571)" + ACD Group number + "#" + [SAVE] To return to available status from Wrap-up status: Press the Wrap-up End Flex button. -or- Dial "ACD Wrap-up End code (585)" + ACD Group number. -or- Dial "ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty code (571)" + ACD group number + "#". The station is placed in available status. Conditions» The system will output a unique event to the Discovery Manager application for a Wrap button depression.» The button type "End" will printout as part of the station printout area.» The Wrap-up Flex button is assigned as an Agent Unavailable button (Default is 571) with the Unavailable code #. Related Features ACD Agent Unavailable & Reason Codes

102 2-76 Automatic Pause Insertion ACD Group Zap Tone Description Agents using a headset can have ACD calls connected to them automatically. The feature removes the requirement for the agent to manually answer ACD calls. A short tone is sent to the agent followed by connection to the ACD caller. Operation When the agent station has Zap tone enabled, operation is automatic. Conditions» The station must be in the headset mode for this feature to operate. Related Features Station Groups Auto ACD-DND Service Description An ACD Agent goes to ACD-DND status when the agent does not answer an ACD call within the overflow time. Automatic Pause Insertion Description In addition to a manually entered Pause, the system will automatically pause dialing to allow for potential connection delays. The pause is inserted when any of the following occur: After a Flash is encountered in a Speed Dial number After a PABX access code is encountered in a Speed Dial or redial number After a Pulse to Tone Switchover is encountered in a Speed Dial or redial number When a connect message is received on an ISDN Line Operation The system automatically pauses dialing after the an appropriate event.

103 Automatic Privacy 2-77 Conditions» An automatically inserted pause is not counted as a digit in a Speed Dial numbers.» The LCD of the IP Keyset will show a "P" when a pause is encountered. This indication is not shown if the system inserts the Pause automatically.» Dial tone detect. Related Features Auto Called Number Redial - page 2-53 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover - page CO Line Flash - page Last Number Redial - page Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Automatic Privacy Description Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature, allowing another station to join in an existing external conversation uninvited. In such a case, a conference is established. Operation To intrude into a call when Privacy is disabled: Press a busy (lit steady) individual {CO}/{IP} access flexible button. User is connected to the call with existing internal station user. Conditions» With Automatic Privacy disabled, privacy is still assured on all intercom and conference calls.» To override privacy, Privacy must be disabled and the intruding station must have Override enabled as well as a direct appearance for the desired CO/IP Line.» Only one station can intrude on an active external CO/IP call.» An intrusion tone can be provided to the call indicating another station has accessed the line.

104 2-78 Automatic Speaker Select» If either internal party presses another {CO}/{IP}, {DSS}, {PAGE}, [CONF] or other conflicting button, the party will be removed from the "Conference" and must press the {CO}/{IP} button again to reenter the conversation. Related Features Conference - page Automatic Speaker Select Description The Automatic Speaker Select feature allows IP Keyset users to access a CO/IP line or an internal circuit by pressing the appropriate button and/or dialing without the need to lift the handset or to press [SPEAKER]. Audio from the CO/IP line or called station is sent to the speaker as if the user pressed [SPEAKER], and the speakerphone's microphone is activated. The feature must be enabled or disabled in admin programming. Operation To access an internal or external system resource: Press an assigned {FLEX} button. -or- Press [REDIAL], or [SPEED] followed by a speed bin number. -or- Dial a desired station number. -or- Dial a CO Line access number followed by desired external phone number. -or- Press a {CO/IP} flexible button and then dial the desired number. Conditions» Paging while on the speakerphone will cause feedback from the paging equipment. If Automatic Speaker Select is disabled and a {PAGE} flexible button is pressed, the display will show "LIFT THE HANDSET". To complete the page, the user must lift the handset within the predefined five-second period or be returned to idle. Related Features On-Hook Dialing Hardware IP Keyset

105 Background Music 2-79 Background Music Description An IP Keyset can receive audio (generally music) from an internal or external source when idle. Music from the source is received over the keyset speaker and will be shut-off during ringing, pages, or while the station is off-hook. Operation To receive background music: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial [73]. 3. Dial a background music option code. [0]: No BGM [1]: BGM 1 [2]: BGM 2 4. Press [SAVE]. ATTENDANT To Transmit a BGM Through External Page Port: 1. Press [PGM]. The [PGM] LED flashes and the [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [074] or [075] (Page 1 or 2). Conditions» The speaker volume is adjustable at the station by using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DN] key in the IP Keyset.» The connections for BGM are made with connections to the MFIM, refer to the Installation Manual» BGM is delayed one second after a return to idle state.» Silence is provided if no BGM source is assigned. Related Features Mute - page 2-164

106 2-80 Broker Call Broker Call Description Broker Call allows an SLT user to engage in two calls, alternating between the two parties, so that the conversation with each party is private. There are two types of Broker Call: Transfer Broker Call: 2nd Call is originated by SLT user. Camped On Broker Call: 2nd Call is delivered to SLT through a Camp On. Operation SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate a Transfer Broker Call: 1. Make or receive an intercom or external call. 2. Briefly press the hookswitch, active call placed in exclusive hold state and receive ICM dial tone. 3. Place second call. 4. To alternate between calls briefly press the hookswitch. To activate a Camp On Broker Call: 1. Make or receive an intercom or external call. You will receive a Call Waiting/Camp On tone. 2. Briefly press the hookswitch. The active call is placed on Exclusive Hold and an ICM dial tone is received. 3. Dial the Camp On Answer feature code [600]. The camped on call is connected. To alternate between the calls: 1. Briefly press the hookswitch. 2. Dial the Camp On Answer feature code [600].

107 Broker Call 2-81 Conditions» After a hookswitch flash, if the call results in an error, busy, no answer or an abnormal state, the SLT user may briefly press hookswitch to retrieve the held call.» During a Transfer Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the Broker call parties are connected completing a Call Transfer.» During a Transfer Broker Call, if the active caller disconnects from the SLT user, the held party, if another station, is connected to the SLT. If the held party is an CO/IP call, the SLT user receives error tone and may go on-hook to receive recall and retrieve the held call.» During a Camp On Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the active call is disconnected and the held call recalls to the SLT.» During a Camp On Broker Call, if the active party disconnects from the SLT, the SLT user receives error tone. The SLT user may briefly press the hookswitch to retrieve the held party or go on-hook and receive recall.» If the SLT user presses the hookswitch twice within a period of about two seconds, a three-way conference is established.» If after a hookswitch "Flash", the user takes no action for the dial tone timer, the SLT will receive error tone. If the SLT goes to an on-hook state, the SLT will receive recall ring automatically. Related Features Call Transfer - page 2-94 Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 Conference - page Exclusive Hold - page Message Wait / Call Back - page 2-159

108 2-82 Call Forward Call Forward Description Users may have incoming calls re-routed to other stations, station groups, the system s VSF, or over the system s CO/IP resources. The user selects the types and conditions under which calls are to be forwarded by entering a Call Forward code as follows: Code 0: Code 1: Code 2: Code 3: Code 4: Code 5: Code 6: Code 7: Code 8: Code 9: Remote Call Forward - forwards calls to the station, except recalls, and is activated from a remote station (Call Forward, Follow-me). Unconditional - all calls to the station, except recalls, are forwarded internally or externally. Busy - forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when station is busy. No Answer - forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer. Busy/No Answer - forwards calls if the station is busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer. Incoming CO Off-Net - forwards incoming CO/IP calls to an outside number. Off-Net Unconditional (for SLT use) Off-Net Busy (for SLT use) Off-Net No Answer (for SLT use) Off-Net Busy / No Answer (for SLT use) IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button that includes the Call Forward code and a station/group/speed number to function as a {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD} button.

109 Call Forward 2-83 Operation To assign a {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [554]/[FWD] + call forward code + sta/grp/speed number + [SAVE] To assign a {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD END} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [554]/[FWD] + call forward code [#] + [SAVE] To activate Call Forward from your series-7000 phone: 1. Dial [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 3. Dial the station number or station group number to receive calls. -or- Press [SPEED], then dial the desired speed bin number. -or, for series-3000 or series-7000 phones- Press the {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD} flexible button. -or, for series-3000 phones- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to receive dial tone. 2. Press [FWD]. 3. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 4. Dial the station number or station group number to receive calls. -or- Press [SPEED], then dial the desired speed bin number. 5. Replace the handset and return to idle. To deactivate Call Forward from your series-7000 phone: Go off hook, press the [FWD] softkey, and dial [#]. -or- Dial [554] + [#]. -or- Press the {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD END} flexible button.

110 2-84 Call Forward To deactivate Call Forward from your series-3000 phone: While idle, press flashing [FWD] button. -or- While off-hook, press flashing [FWD] button, then dial [#]. Call Forward deactivates and [FWD] LED extinguishes. -or- Press the {ONE-TOUCH CALL FORWARD END} flexible button. To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different series-3000 phone (Remote/(Follow-me): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to receive dial tone. 2. Press [FWD]. 3. Dial Call Forward code [0]. 4. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 5. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 6. Dial the station number or station group number to receive calls. -or- Press [SPEED], then dial the desired speed bin number. 7. Replace the handset and return to idle. To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different series-7000 phone (Remote/(Follow-me): 1. Dial [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial Call Forward code [0]. 3. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 4. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 5. Dial the station number or station group number to receive calls. -or- Press [SPEED], then dial the desired speed bin number.

111 Call Forward 2-85 To deactivate Call Forward for your phone from a different series-7000 phone (Remote/(Follow-me): 1. Dial [554] or go off hook and press the FWD softkey. 2. Dial Call Forward code [0]. 3. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 4. Dial [#]. To deactivate Call Forward for your phone from a different series-3000 phone (Remote/(Follow-me): 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to receive dial tone. 2. Press [FWD]. 3. Dial Call Forward code [0]. 4. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 5. Dial [#]. 6. Replace the handset and return to idle. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate Call Forward from your phone to an internal destination: 1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone. 2. Dial Call Forward feature dial code [554]. 3. Dial desired Call Forward code (1-4). 1 = Unconditional (All calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer 4. Dial station or station group to receive the calls. 5. Replace the handset and return to idle. To deactivate the Call forward from your phone: 1. Lift the handset, receive stutter dial tone. 2. Dial Call Forward feature access dial code [554]. 3. Dial [#] to cancel Call Forward. To activate a Call Forward from your phone to an external number: 1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone. 2. Dial Call Forward feature access dial code [554]. 3. Dial Call Forward code (6-9). 6 = Off-Net Unconditional (All calls) 8 = Off-Net No Answer 7 = Off-Net Busy 9 = Off-Net Busy / No Answer

112 2-86 Call Forward 4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number. 5. Replace the handset and return to idle. To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different station to ring at an external destination: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Call Forward feature code [554]. 3. Dial Call Forward code [0]. 4. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 5. Dial the desired Call Forward code (6-9). 6 = Off-Net Unconditional (All calls) 8 = Off-Net No Answer 7 = Off-Net Busy 9 = Off-Net Busy / No Answer 6. Dial the Speed Dial bin number. 7. Replace the handset and return to idle. To activate Call Forward for your phone from an external phone to ring at an external destination: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the telephone number of a DISA-assigned CO line. 3. Dial the Call Forward feature code [554]. 4. Dial the source station s Authorization Code (station number & password). 5. Dial the desired Call Forward code (6-9). 6 = Off-Net Unconditional (All calls) 8 = Off-Net No Answer 7 = Off-Net Busy 9 = Off-Net Busy / No Answer 6. Dial the Speed Dial bin number. 7. Replace the handset and return to idle. Conditions» A station receiving a forwarded call can place and transfer the call to the forwarding station.» A station, which is denied the use of Call Forward, will receive error tone in response to attempts to activate Call Forward.» A forwarded intercom call will signal the receiving station in the Tone Signaling mode, regardless of the Intercom Signaling Mode at the station.» Calls cannot be forwarded to a station in DND, and if attempted an error tone is returned.» Attempting activation of Call Forward will automatically deactivate DND or any active Custom Display Message. Active Call Back or Queue requests are not canceled.

113 Call Forward 2-87» When Call Forward is active, a station can make internal or external calls.» Private lines can be forwarded if the forwarding and receiving station have a direct appearance {CO} flexible button for Private line.» For CO/IP calls, manually activated Call Forward will override any Preset Call Forward assigned for the station.» With Call Forward, No Answer active, incoming CO/IP calls will ring the station for the No Answer Ring Timer before the call is forwarded.» Users may forward calls to the VSF without recording a greeting, in which case, callers receive the "No announcement recorded" message.» Call Forward states are maintained in the system s non-volatile memory for protection from power outage.» Off-Net Call Forward of incoming CO/IP calls is essentially an automated DISA call, which will establish an Unsupervised Conference. Such calls are subject to the conditions of a DISA call and Unsupervised Conference.» Off-Net forwarded calls are not answered until the system completes dialing. The internal or external call is then connected to the Off-Net call.» If the Speed Dial number used in Off-Net Call Forward contains a Flash, only digits prior to the Flash are dialed.» An unlimited number of stations may be set up in a Call Forward chain, forwarding calls from one station to the next. However, a station cannot forward calls to a station already a part of the chain.» Calls to a Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to the last station. If the last station has entered DND, CO/IP calls revert to the previous station while intercom calls receive DND tone.» If the System Attendant uses Unconditional Call Forward, the receiving station will receive Attendant calls and recall ring. Additionally, if the receiving station is an IP Keyset, the user is able to activate features normally reserved for the System Attendant.» The system requires at least one available Attendant. The last available Attendant cannot activate Call Forward to an Attendant who has activated the Alternate Attendant feature. Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 Call Forward, Preset - page 2-88 Dialing Privileges - page Direct Inward System Access - page Do Not Disturb - page Intercom Signaling Mode - page Station Groups - page 2-203

114 2-88 Call Forward, Preset Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Unsupervised Conference - page Call Forward, Preset Description This feature allows the system administrator to program a station, or a range of stations, to forward calls to a pre-determined destination. Preset Call Forwarding programming options include unconditional (forwarding of all calls), internal busy (forwarding of internal-based calls when the station is in a busy state), internal no answer (forwarding of internal-based calls when the station does not answer), external busy (forwarding of external-based calls when the station is in a busy state), and external no answer (forwarding of external-based calls when the station does not answer). The destination can be set to forward calls to a station, to a hunt group (including VM group), or to a speed bin. Operation The system operates this feature automatically. Conditions» If the forward destination is VSF-VM or commercial VM, all calls (including private line calls) will be forwarded.» Unconditional Preset Call Forward is the same as Station Call Forward - Unconditional.» The Internal Busy option will forward internal-based calls immediately, when the station is in a busy state.» The Internal No Answer option will forward internal-based calls when the station does not answer the call within Call Forward No Answer Timer limit.» The External Busy option will forward external-based calls immediately, when the station is in a busy state.» The External No Answer option will forward external-based calls when the station does not answer the call within Call Forward No Answer Timer limit.» A call forward setting at the station will override system-programmed Preset Call Forwarding for the station.» It is possible to program a combination of Internal No Answer/Internal Busy/External No Answer/External Busy options.» Preset Call Forwarding status is not displayed on the station s LCD.» When a station user presses [FWD] to cancel station call forwarding, this does not affect programming of Preset Call Forwarding.

115 Call Log Display 2-89 Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Call Log Display Description User s of Telenium IP Phones with Soft keys (7024D and 7024LD) can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed calls on the display. A Flex button can be assigned as a {CALL LOG} button for easy access to the Call Log menu. Operation IP KEYSET To assign a {CALL LOG} button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] [SAVE] To access the Call Log menu: 1. Press the {CALL LOG} button. STATION 101 (T) 14 NOV 05 14:30 CALLED DIALED LOST 2. Select the desired call log (incoming, outgoing, or missed) using the soft keys. STATION 101 (T) 14 NOV 05 14:30 PREV NEXT SEND 3. Use Previous and Next soft keys to view the log contents. Hardware Telenium IP 7024D & 7024LD Phone

116 2-90 Call Park Call Park Description A user may place an active CO/IP call in a special holding location (Park Orbit) for easy access from any station in the system. Park Orbit locations are for MFIM systems and for MFIME systems. An IP Keyset can assign a flexible button as a {CALL PARK} button. Operation To assign a {CALL PARK} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + Park Orbit location + [SAVE] To park an active external call: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Dial the Park Orbit location. 3. Return to idle. -or- Press the {CALL PARK} flexible button. To retrieve a parked call: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Park Orbit location. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To park an active external call: 1. Briefly press the hookswitch. 2. Dial the Park Orbit location. 3. Return to idle. To retrieve a parked call: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Park Orbit location.

117 Call Pick Up 2-91 Conditions» If the selected Park Orbit returns a busy signal, the user may simply dial another Park Orbit location without the need to disconnect.» Intercom calls cannot be placed in a Park Orbit.» A Parked call will recall to the station that parked the call should the Call Park Timer expire. The normal Hold Recall process is then initiated.» A Parked call will indicate busy at all appearances. Related Features Attendant Recall - page 2-12 Exclusive Hold - page Call Pick Up Directed Call Pick Up Description A station user may answer ("Pick Up") incoming and transferred Intercom, CO and IP calls ringing at another station. All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick Up except Private Line and Queue Callbacks. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {DIRECTED CALL PICK UP} button. Operation To assign a {DIRECTED CALL PICK UP} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [7] + [SAVE] To pick up a call ringing at another station: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Directed Call Pick Up feature code [7]. 3. Dial the ringing station s Intercom number, -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {DIRECTED CALL PICK UP} flexible button. 3. Dial the ringing station s Intercom number.

118 2-92 Call Pick Up SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To pickup a call ringing at another station: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Directed Call Pick Up feature access code [7]. 3. Dial the ringing station s Intercom number. Conditions» To pickup a CO/IP call, the station must have an idle appearance button.» When several calls are ringing at the station, Call Pick Up will connect the oldest call with the highest priority (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).» Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick Up, and such attempts will produce an error tone.» An intercom call to station in the H or P Intercom Signaling Mode is not subject to Call Pick Up, and such attempts will produce an error tone. Related Features Group Call Pick Up - page 2-93 Intercom Signaling Mode - page Ringing Line Preference (RLP) - page 2-187

119 Call Pick Up 2-93 Group Call Pick Up Description A station can answer ("Pick Up") incoming and transferred Intercom, CO and IP calls ringing at another station in the same Station Pickup Group. All ringing calls except for Private Lines and queue callbacks are subject to Pickup by other group member stations. Stations in other types of Station Groups, if allowed, may also use Group Call Pick Up. IP Keyset users may assign a button as a {GRP PICK UP} flexible button. Operation To assign a {GRP PICK UP} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [566] + [SAVE] To answer a call ringing at a station in the same group: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Group Call Pick Up feature code [566], -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {GRP PICK UP} flexible button. The call is connected. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To answer a call ringing at another station: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Group Call Pick Up access code [566]. Conditions» To pickup a CO/IP call, the station must have an idle appearance button.» When several calls are ringing at the station, Call Pick Up will connect the oldest call with the highest priority (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).» Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick Up and such attempts will return error tone.» An intercom call to a station in the H or P Intercom Signaling Mode is not subject to Call Pick Up and such attempts will produce an error tone.» When a station belongs to multiple station groups and calls are ringing at more than one of the groups, calls are answered from the lowest to highest Station Group Number ( or in MFIM/MFIME systems).

120 2-94 Call Transfer Related Features Directed Call Pick Up - page 2-91 Intercom Signaling Mode - page Ringing Line Preference (RLP) - page Station Groups - page Call Transfer Station Call Transfer Description CO/IP calls can be transferred to other stations in the Telenium IP System. Calls can be transferred after announcing the call (screened) or without announcing the call (unscreened). When a call is transferred, the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated. If this timer expires before the call is answered, the normal Hold Recall process will apply. Operation While on a CO/IP call, Screened call transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Dial the station to receive call. 3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. -or- 1. Press the {DSS/BLF} flexible button for the desired station. 2. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. While on a CO/IP call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Dial the station to receive call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. -or- 1. Press {DSS/BLF} flexible button for the desired station. 2. Hang up, return to idle.

121 Call Transfer 2-95 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE While on a CO/IP call, Screened call transfer: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial the station to receive call. 3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. While on a CO/IP call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial the station to receive call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. Conditions» If the receiving station is busy, the transferring station may camp the call onto the busy station.» The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} flexible button will display the status of a call until the station no longer has call supervision, e.g., the call is successfully transferred, etc.» To prevent toll abuse, CO/IP lines without an active call (either incoming or dialed digits on outgoing) cannot be transferred.» For outgoing CO line calls, the Telenium IP System will monitor the CO line for dial tone to prevent toll abuse. When an IP line is seized, the system does not monitor dial tone. Related Features Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 Exclusive Hold - page 2-136

122 2-96 Call Transfer CO/IP to CO/IP Call Transfer Description A Station may transfer a CO/IP call to another CO/IP call setting up an Unsupervised Conference between the two CO/IP parties. If the receiving party is called through an ISDN or VoIP path and does not answer the transferred call within the system s Transfer Hold Recall time, the normal hold recall process will be invoked. Operation While on a CO/IP call, Screened call transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Place CO/IP call in normal manner. 3. At answer, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. While on a CO/IP call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Place CO/IP call in normal manner. 3. Hang up, return to idle. -or- 1. Press {DSS/BLF} flexible button for the desired station. 2. Hang up, return to idle. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE While on a CO/IP call, Screened call transfer: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Place CO/IP call. 3. At answer, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. While on a CO/IP call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Place CO/IP call. 3. Hang up, return to idle.

123 Call Transfer 2-97 Conditions» For this feature, at least one of two CO/IP line (transferred CO/IP or receiving CO/IP) must provide disconnect supervision.» ISDN and VoIP calls provide Answer Supervision, thus the Telenium IP can enable Transfer Recall. Related Features Call Transfer, Station - page 2-94 Unsupervised Conference - page Call Transfer - Voice Mail Description CO/IP calls can be directly transferred to a station's voice mailbox, either VSF or an external Voice Mail system. Operation IP Keyset While on a CO/IP call, Screened Call Transfer 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Press [MSG/CALLBK] button. 3. Dial the number or press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station. 4. Hang-up to complete the transfer. Conditions» The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} button will display the status of a call until the station no longer has call supervision i.e.; the call is successfully transferred. Programming Direct Transfer Mailbox Destination (PGM 120, Btn 6) Transfer Recall Timer (PGM 180, Btn 7) Related Features Camp-On External Auto/Attendant/Voice Mail Hold Recall PathFinder IP VSF-Voice Mail

124 2-98 Call Waiting / Camp On Call Waiting / Camp On Description Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that an Intercom call is waiting. The busy station is notified of the call waiting by "Camp On" tone. For users of the LED IP Keyset, the LED of the [HOLD] button will flash. After receiving a busy signal, the calling station Camps-On to the called station. The called station can respond by one of the following: - Answering the waiting call, placing the active call on Hold first - Sending a Silent Message - Activating One-Time DND - Ignoring the Camp On tone. Operation To create a {Camp On} flexible button: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press {FLEX}. 3. Press [PGM]. 4. Dial [88]. 5. Press [SAVE]. To activate a Camp On while receiving Intercom busy tone: Press [ ], -or Press the {Camp On} flexible button. The called/calling station receives a Camp On tone.

125 Call Waiting / Camp On 2-99 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate call waiting while receiving intercom busy tone: 1. Dial [ ] or the last digit of the dialed station number. Dialed station hears Camp On tone and dialing station hears ring back tone. 2. Await answer to announce the call. -or- Replace the handset and go on-hook. To answer the Call Waiting / Camp On: 1. An SLT station is in busy state and hears Camp On tone. 2. Flash the hook switch and dial Broker Call code [600]. The SLT is connected to the station that activated Call Waiting / Camp On or transferred the call. 3. Flash the hook switch and dial broker call code [600] again. The SLT is connected to the original station. Conditions» The user may not Camp On to a station in other than the busy mode, e.g., DND.» The Camp On procedure is employed to activate DND Override by an Attendant or the Secretary of an Executive/Secretary.» A station in a conference or conducting a page cannot receive a Call Waiting.» If the calling station disconnects from the ICM call, the Camp On is canceled.» A Camp On tone is sent each time the calling station presses [ ].» A text message, Pre-Selected or Custom may be used as a called station response (Silent Text Message). Related Features Custom Messages - page Do Not Disturb - page DND Override - page 2-24 Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Pre-selected Messages - page Off-Hook Voice Over - page Silent Text Messaging - page 2-115

126 2-100 CO/IP Call Time Restriction (CCTR) CO/IP Call Time Restriction (CCTR) Description The system can be programmed to limit the length of outgoing calls by assigned stations. When these stations place an outgoing call, the system initiates the Call Drop Timer. A warning tone is delivered 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer setting. At expiration, the system terminates the call and returns the external path to idle. Operation When assigned, the system operates this feature automatically. Conditions» Once activated, the Call Drop timer continues while the call is connected to the system, transfers, pickup, etc. CO/IP Call Warning Tone Description Stations can receive a tone indicating the elapsed time on a CO/IP call. The station hears the warning tone after a pre-assigned time has elapsed. Operation Assigned station receives warning tone automatically. Conditions» Warning tone sounds 15 seconds prior to the timer expiration.

127 CO/IP Line Access CO/IP Line Access Description Stations are permitted to access outgoing CO/IP lines based on CO/IP Group Access programming. IP Keysets may use flexible buttons assigned to access a specific {CO} line, a {POOL} CO line group flexible button for outgoing calls, or {LOOP} flexible button for incoming or outgoing calls. Operation To assign a {LOOP} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [85] + [SAVE] To assign the {POOL} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [8xx] + [SAVE] xx: CO/IP Group number (01 to 20 for MFIM or for MFIME) To place an outgoing CO/IP call: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the desired {CO} line, {POOL}, {LOOP} flexible button, dial the CO line, or group access code ([88xx], [8xx], [9] for MFIM systems; or [88xxx], [8xxx], [9] for MFIME systems). To answer an incoming CO/IP call: Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER], -or- Press the desired {CO} line, {POOL}, {LOOP} flexible button, lift the handset to speak privately. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To place an outgoing CO/IP call: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the CO/IP line or group access code ([88xx], [8xx], [9] for MFIM systems; or [88xxx], [8xxx], [9] for MFIME systems). To answer an incoming CO/IP call: Lift the handset.

128 2-102 CO/IP Line Access Conditions» When a user dials [9] the system will search the 1st CO/IP group for an idle CO/IP line. The system may continue the search through all groups for an available CO/IP line, if 1st CO/IP Group Override is enabled.» A telephone user not allowed access to a CO/IP line will receive error tone when the {CO} flexible button is pressed or access code is dialed. The station can receive transfers of such denied access CO/IP lines but cannot flash or use the CO/IP line for an outgoing call.» A telephone denied access to a CO/IP line, but assigned to have that CO/IP line ring will receive ringing, {CO} LED illumination and can answer the line; the telephone user can transfer the line, but cannot flash or use the CO/IP line for an outgoing call.» CO/IP lines placed on Hold may be regained by dialing [8 ] at the station placing the call on hold or [8#] and the CO/IP number at a station other than the one that placed the call on hold.» The Tx path of station to CO/IP line will be muted until the system has the opportunity to verify the toll restriction.» When a CO line is seized, the system monitors dial tone.» Outgoing lines are selected on a round-robin basis or last choice as defined in the Admin database.» When an IP Keyset is not assigned Ringing Line Preference the user press the signaling CO/IP line button to answer the call.» IP Keyset users can be assigned exclusive use of a CO/IP line, Private line. Related Features CO/IP Line Groups - page CO/IP Line Ring Assignment - page Private Line - page Ringing Line Preference (RLP) - page 2-187

129 CO/IP Line Groups CO/IP Line Groups Description The CO/IP lines in the system can be placed together into groups (01-20, MFIM; 01-72, MFIME) for assigning access to stations and common access dial codes. Unused CO lines should be assigned to CO/IP Group 21 and Private Lines should be assigned to CO/IP Group 00. Conditions» All CO/IP line groups are accessible with a prearranged dial code.» CO/IP lines in a Group 01 through 20 (MFIM) and Group (MFIME) can be accessed individually by dialing the code [88] and the CO/IP line number.» The CO/IP lines assigned to group 00 can be accessed only by {CO} line buttons (Private Lines).» The system will select a CO/IP line from a group based on the Round Robin or Last Choice determined by database assignments.

130 2-104 CO/IP Line Ring Assignment CO/IP Line Ring Assignment Description Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system detects an incoming call on specified CO/IP lines. Separate ring assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring operation mode. Also, the audible signal at the station can be delayed by 1 to 9 ring cycles to allow other stations to answer the call first. Operation Operation of this feature is automatic. Conditions» Separate assignments are made for stations to ring in the Day, Night, and/or Timed Ring mode.» Audible alerting for an incoming VoIP call is based only on the derived IP Address of the MFIM.» A busy station may receive Muted ring or Call Waiting tones as appropriate for the station s off-hook ring assignment.» The system Ring mode can be selected manually or automatically. In the Automatic mode, Day/Night selection is determined based on the Automatic Ring Mode Selection table. The System Attendant has manual control over the Ring mode selection.» The LCD of the System Attendant station will display Night and Timed Ring Mode and the [DND] LED will flash.» If a CO/IP line is not assigned to ring at any station, incoming calls on the CO/IP line will ring the first available Attendant. Related Features Automatic Ring Mode Selection Day / Night / Timed Ring Mode - page 2-21 Off-Hook Signaling - page 2-173

131 CO/IP Line Name Display CO/IP Line Name Display Description When a CO/IP call is received or a user seizes a CO/IP path, the CO/IP number is displayed on the LCD. If the CO/IP path is assigned a name and CO/IP Name Display is enabled, the CO/IP name is displayed instead of the CO/IP number. Operation To display the CO/IP line name while calling: Press the {CO} flexible button, or CO Access code. LCD displays CO/IP line name. Conditions» CO/IP line name can be assigned to each CO/IP line.» Each CO/IP line name has a maximum of 12 characters.» Only the System Attendant and the Administrator can assign CO/IP line names. Hardware IP Keyset w/display CO/IP Line Queuing Description When CO/IP lines are busy, allowed users can request to be placed on a list awaiting the CO/IP line or a CO/IP line in the same group to become available. When a CO line becomes available, the system calls the waiting station, on a first in, first out basis. When a CO/IP line becomes available: The system will send a distinctive Queue recall to the station with the oldest queue, flashing the appropriate {CO/IP} flexible button LED. The CO/IP line and station are busy to all other internal users.

132 2-106 CO/IP Line Queuing Operation To request to be placed in queue for a busy CO line: 1. Press busy {CO} or {CO/IP GRP} flexible button. 2. Press the [CALLBK] button. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Hang up. The [CALLBK] button LED flashes. To cancel the queue from queued station: Press [CALLBK]. The [CALLBK] LED extinguishes. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To request to be placed in queue: 1. Flash the hook switch upon receipt of busy tone. 2. Dial the code [556]. A confirmation tone is received when the queue is accepted. 3. When a line becomes available, it rings the SLT. When the SLT lifts handset, CO dial tone is heard signaling and the CO/IP line is ready to be dialed on. To cancel CO/IP line queuing: 1. Lift handset and hear ICM dial tone. 2. Dial code [556]. Conditions» A CO/IP line can have any number of queues requested at one time.» A station is permitted only one CO/IP line queuing request at time. If a station activates a new CO/IP line queuing, the previous queue is cancelled.» A Queue recall will always signal the station with tone ring and is not affected by the Station s Intercom Signal mode.» If the waiting station is busy, and a CO/IP line becomes available, the station is moved to the bottom of the queue list. The available CO/IP line will then be directed to the next station that is idle.» If the queued station is idle, and a CO/IP line becomes available, the station receives Queue recall for up to 15 seconds. After the 15-second period, the system cancels the queue.

133 CO Line Flash CO Line Flash Description Analog CO lines recognize a brief open or ground connection, "Flash", as a request for new dial tone. When used behind a PBX, a Flash is used to activate a PBX feature or call transfer. Operation While connected to an analog CO line: Press [FLASH]. The system generates a flash on the CO line. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE While connected to an analog CO line: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial the Flash feature code [551]. Conditions» Stations may Flash on a CO Line defined for PABX operation and will experience COS dialing restrictions if a PABX Trunk access code is dialed.» During a flash, the LED for the CO line button will remain lit.» A Flash may be stored as a part of a Station or System Speed Dial number.» While connected to an internal call or dial tone, pressing [FLASH] will regain ICM dial tone.» While making a Page Announcement (internal or external, including all call paging), pressing [FLASH] will terminate the Page Announcement and return ICM dial tone.» The Flash function is not available on VoIP calls.

134 2-108 Conference Conference Multi-Party Conference Description The system allows any combination of internal and external parties, maximum of three parties, to be connected in a conference. Operation IP7008D users must create a CONF flexible button. To assign a {CONF} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [91] + [SAVE] To set up a conference: 1. Establish first call. 2. Press [CONF] button or softkey. The connected party is placed on exclusive hold. The user receives ICM Dial tone. 3. Call next party to be included in the conference. 4. When connected, press [CONF] button or softkey to establish conference. New party is placed on hold. 5. Press [CONF] button or softkey a second time, all parties are connected. Do not try to add a 4th party to the conference. If you press [CONF] in an attempt to add a 4th party, you will receive an error tone and when you press [CONF] again to try to return to the conference all parties are disconnected. To place a conference on hold: Press [HOLD]. [CONF] LED flashes. To retrieve a held conference: Press [CONF] button or softkey. All parties are connected. To remove a party from the conference: 1. Press the individual {CO}/{IP}/{DSS} flexible button. 2. Return to idle. 3. Press the individual {CO}/{IP}/{DSS} flexible button to regain the remaining party.

135 Conference SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To set up a conference: 1. Establish first call. 2. Briefly press the hookswitch, the party is placed on Exclusive Hold and ICM Dial tone sounds. 3. Call next party to be included in the conference. 4. Briefly press the hookswitch twice in two seconds. All parties connect. Conditions» The [CONF] button will remain lit at the initiating station throughout the duration of the conference.» There is no limit on the number of three-way conferences the system will support.» If the system receives disconnect supervision when a conference party hangs up and an internal user is still party to the conference, the remaining parties are connected as in normal two-party call. If no internal user is connected, the conference is terminated and all parties disconnected.» Normal Hold Recall processes will apply to a conference on hold should the Unsupervised Conference Timer expire.» If while setting up the conference, system error or busy tone sounds while adding a party, the conference initiator must press [CONF] (SLT must hook-flash) to receive ICM dial tone.» A station that is busy, in DND or other non-idle state cannot be added to a conference. Related Features Automatic Speaker Select - page 2-78 Broker Call - page 2-80 Exclusive Hold - page Unsupervised Conference - page 2-110

136 2-110 Conference Unsupervised Conference Description A Telenium IP phone user may establish a conference with two external parties and exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without supervision from the user. The system will disconnect the Unsupervised conference if disconnect is detected or at expiration of the Unsupervised Conference timer. Fifteen seconds prior to expiration of the timer, a Disconnect Warning Tone is provided. If enabled, either party in an Unsupervised Conference can request the Unsupervised Conference timer be extended. The party enters the Timer Extension feature code and a digit 1 to 9 indicating the Timer extension multiplier. The system will then extend the timer based on the dialed digit. For example, if the Unsupervised Conference timer is 5 minutes and the user dials the digit 4, the timer will extend to 20 minutes (4 multiplied by 5 minutes). Operation To set up an Unsupervised Conference: 1. Establish a normal conference. 2. Press [CONF]. The [CONF] LED flashes at 120 ipm rate to indicate the held Unsupervised Conference status and the conference initiator returns to idle. To re-enter an Unsupervised Conference: Press the flashing [CONF] button. To extend an Unsupervised Conference: A connected party must dial [##], then dial the extension multiplier (1-9) Conditions» An Unsupervised Conference will be terminated if the system receives a disconnect signal or the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires. An Unsupervised Conference will not recall the user.» The Unsupervised Conference Timer also applies to an external call placed by a DISA user. Related Features Direct Inward System Access - page 2-125

137 CPI Message Wait CPI Message Wait Description When an IP Keyset with Display receives an external call (ISDN or IP) with Calling Party Identification (CPI) and the call is lost (abandoned), disconnects before answered, the system will generate a call log with the Caller Identification, date and time. The user may employ this log to review and, if desired, return the call. Operation To review CPI Messages: 1. Press the flashing {MSG/CALLBK} button, the first CPI message information is displayed. 2. Press the [VOL UP] or [VOL DOWN] button to scroll through CPI message wait information. The following is an example of the display you receive if there is no caller ID information associated with an incoming call.???????? To delete the current CPI Message: Press [ ]. The next CPI message displays. To return a call to the current CPI message: Press [CALLBK].

138 2-112 CPI Message Wait Conditions» The total number of Message Wait indications in queue for the system is Should the Message Wait buffer fill, the buffer full message as below will be output over the RS-232 port. "WARNING: MESSAGE WAITING BUFFER FULL"» The CPI Message Wait display includes date, time, count and the received Calling Party Identification. The count is the number of attempts by the specific calling party. The date and time are the date and time of the latest attempt by the calling party.» CPI Message Wait status is stored in non-volatile battery protected memory to protect against power failure.» When a CO/IP call is assigned to ring multiple stations or a Ring Group, CPI Message Wait is not saved.» When the call is routed to a member of UCD/ Circular/ Terminal station group, the Message Wait will be provided to the last ringing station before the release of the external call.» Once a call is answered by a station within the system, CPI Message Wait is no longer available, i.e., transferred calls do not provide CIP Message Wait.» A CPI Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call is forwarded to another station.» The user may toggle between CPI number and CPI user name, if available, by pressing [TRANS].» For SMDR, the CPI will be included along with the station number called.

139 CPI Message Wait 2-113» For ISDN calls, the CPI Message Wait display and number to be dialed are based on assignments in PGM Code 200 for the following: - Incoming Prefix Code - My Area Code - My Prefix Area Code - International Access Code Based on the above assignments, an IP Keyset will display the "CPI" number as shown in the following table: Prefix Code Admin Setting Area Code Country Code International Access Code CLI Received Call type and CLI number in SETUP message No National and No National and No National and Yes National and Yes Subscriber and Yes International and LCD Related Features ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) - page Message Wait / Call Back - page Hardware IP Keyset

140 2-114 Custom Messages Custom Messages Description Up to 11 Custom Messages may be used per station. Ten Custom Messages (numbers 11-20) are programmed by the Attendant for system-wide use. One Custom Message (message 00) can be programmed by each station user for their individual use. When the Custom Message Display is activated, the LCD of a calling IP Keyset user will display the selected message. These messages can also be used for Silent Text Messaging to respond to an OHVO call. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {CUSTOM MESSAGE} activation button. A flexible button can also be programmed as a {ONE-TOUCH CUSTOM MESSAGE} button. Operation To assign a {CUSTOM MESSAGE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [51] + [SAVE] To assign a {ONE-TOUCH CUSTOM MESSAGE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [51] + Message code (00 or 11-20) + [SAVE] To activate Custom Display Message: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial User Program feature code [51]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial the two-digit Message code (00 or 11-20). 4. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds, the [FWD] LED flashes, and the station returns to idle. -or- 1. Press the {CUSTOM MESSAGE} flexible button. 2. Dial two-digit message code (00 or 11-20). 3. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds, [FWD] LED flashes, and the station returns to idle. -or- 1. Press the {ONE-TOUCH CUSTOM MESSAGE} flexible button. 2. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds, [FWD] LED flashes, and the station returns to idle.

141 Custom Messages To cancel activated Message: Press the flashing [FWD] button. To program a Custom Message (00) at a Station: 1. Press [PGM]. The [SPEAKER] LED lights steady and [PGM] LED flashes. 2. Dial User Program feature code [52]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters. Refer to Figure 2-13 on page Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and the station returns to idle. To use a Custom Message for Silent Text Messaging: Press the {CUSTOM MESSAGE} flexible button after another caller interrupts your current call with an Off-Hook Voice Over. The OHVO caller receives your Silent Text Messaging response on their LCD. SYSTEM ATTENDANT To activate a Custom Display Message for other station users: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Program feature code [051]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Enter the station range to activate Custom Messages. 4. Dial the two-digit Message code (11-20). 5. Press [SAVE]. The Attendant receives confirmation tone, the [FWD] LED of appropriate stations flash, and the Attendant returns to idle. To cancel activated Message: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Program feature code [052]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Enter the station range. 4. Press [SAVE]. The Attendant receives confirmation tone, returns to idle, and the [FWD] LEDs return to normal. To program Custom Messages: 1. Press [PGM]. [SPEAKER] LED lights steady and [PGM] LED flashes. 2. Dial Attendant Program feature code [053]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial the desired Message code (11-20). 4. Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters. Refer to Figure 2-13 on page Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and Attendant returns to idle.

142 2-116 Custom Messages SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate Custom Display Message: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial SLT Programming Code [561]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial User Program feature code [51]. The user receives confirmation tone. 4. Enter the two-digit Message code (00 or 11-20). 5. Briefly press hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds. To cancel Custom Display Message: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial feature dial code [559]. To program a Station Custom Message (00) at an SLT Station: 1. Dial SLT Programming Code [561]. Confirmation tone sounds. 2. Dial User Program feature code [52]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters. Refer to Figure 2-13 on page Briefly press hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds. Conditions» Only the System Attendant can program the contents for Custom Messages » The alphanumeric characters display as they are entered.» SLTs are notified of the active status of Custom Display Messages with a stutter dial tone when going off-hook.» Custom Display Message displays are canceled if the user activates DND or Call Forward.» Messages and status are stored in the non-volatile battery-protected area of memory for retention in case of a power failure. Related Features Pre-selected Messages - page 2-182

143 Dial By Name Dial By Name Description A name, up to 16 characters, may be assigned to Station and System Speed Dial bins. In addition, each station can be assigned a 12-character name. These names are used with the Dial By Name feature. When names are programmed, the user may place an Intercom call to another station or select a Station (User) or System Speed Dial number using the name. The user selects from one of the three Dial By Name directories (Internal, User Speed Dial, or System Speed Dial) and enters alphanumeric data with two dial pad keystrokes per character. The system finds and displays the first nearest match based on the characters entered. The user may at any point, scroll through the names in the directory and select a name to call. The number matching a selected name can be shown by the LCD, using [TRANS]. Operation To use Dial By Name: 1. Press [SPEED] twice. 2. Dial the desired directory, [1]: Intercom, [2]: User Speed Dial, [3]: System Speed Dial. Confirmation tone sounds and the LCD displays the first two names, in alphabetical order. 3. Search the names database by entering characters (two dial pad entries) or scroll using the [VOL UP/DOWN] buttons. To enter characters, refer to Figure 2-13 on page Press [SAVE] to place the call. To toggle between the name and number display: 1. Press [TRANS]. The number related to the name pointed at by the cursor is displayed. 2. Press [TRANS] once more. The name is displayed. To program the station user name: 1. Press [PGM] and dial [74]. 2. Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to Figure 2-13 on page or to Table 5-1, Keypad Codes to Program a Station User Name, on page 5-61 for IP7024LD phones).

144 2-118 Dial By Name 3. Press [SAVE]. SYSTEM ATTENDANT To program the station user name: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Program feature code [071]. 3. Dial the station number. 4. Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to Figure 2-13 on page 2-207). 5. Press [SAVE]. Conditions» The LCD displays two names, up to 16 characters each, one on each line of the LCD.» If the user selects a directory with no name entries or there is no match to the user name input, an "INVALID" message displays and an error tone sounds.» If there is no match to the user name input, an error tone sounds.» A station without a LCD receives an error tone when attempting to access Dial By Name. Related Features Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Hardware IP Keyset with LCD is required

145 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover Description On a pulse dial CO line, the user can request the system to switch signaling mode from pulse to DTMF signals. This allows the user access to outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as banking services, voice mail, etc. Operation To switch from pulse to DTMF while on a pulse CO line: 1. Dial [ ]. 2. Dial digits as required. Conditions» In speed dialing this command will automatically insert a pause before sending the remaining digits.» This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines.» A pulse dial SLT does not support " ".» Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available in Redial.» As the first digit in a Speed Dial number, [ ] will enable display Security and not a Pulse to Tone switchover.» For VoIP calls, pulse dialing is not supported and switchover is not supported.

146 2-120 Dialing Privileges Dialing Privileges Class of Service Description Dialing privileges are assigned for each station and DISA user. Dialing privileges are the result of the interaction of the Station and CO/IP Class of Service (COS) assignments. The system administrator programs COS assignments to provide the appropriate level of access for each user in the system. Temporary Station COS Change (Station Lock) Description A user or the Attendant can change the Station s Class of Service to Station COS 7 (intercom and emergency call dialing only) to temporarily prevent unauthorized toll dialing from the station. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {STATION LOCK} and {STATION UNLOCK} button. Operation To assign a {STATION LOCK} flexible button: [PGM] + [FLEX] + [PGM] + [21] + [SAVE] To assign a {STATION UNLOCK} flexible button: [PGM] + [FLEX] + [PGM] + [22] + Sta number + Auth Code + [SAVE] To activate temporary Station COS: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature dial code [21]. 3. Press [SAVE]. -or- Press {STATION LOCK} flexible button. To restore assigned Station COS: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature dial code [22]. 3. Dial Station number.

147 Dialing Privileges Dial Authorization Code. 5. Press [SAVE]. -or- Press {STATION UNLOCK} flexible button. SYSTEM ATTENDANT To activate temporary Station COS: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature dial code [021]. 3. Dial station range. 4. Press [SAVE]. To restore assigned Station COS: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature dial code [022]. 3. Dial station range. 4. Press [SAVE]. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate temporary Station COS: 1. Briefly press the hook switch. 2. Dial the SLT Programming code [561]. 3. Dial feature dial code [21]. 4. Briefly press the hookswitch. To restore assigned Station COS: 1. Briefly press the hook switch. 2. Dial the SLT Programming code [561]. 3. Dial feature dial code [22]. 4. Dial Authorization Code. 5. Briefly press the hookswitch. Conditions» The station will be restored to the Station COS defined for the active system mode (Day/Night/Timed). Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 Walking COS - page 2-122

148 2-122 Dialing Privileges Walking COS Description This feature allows a user to temporarily override toll restriction and make a toll call from a normally toll-restricted station. The user must input an Authorization Code to activate a Walking COS. The COS associated with the Authorization Code will be applied after entry. Operation To activate Walking COS: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature code [23]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Enter a station number and the Authorization Code for the station. A dial tone sounds and the Station COS assigned to the Authorization Code is applied for this call only. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate Walking COS: 1. Briefly press the hookswitch. 2. Dial the SLT Programming code [569]. 3. Dial feature code [23]. Confirmation tone sounds. 4. Enter a station number and the Authorization Code for the station. An ICM dial tone sounds and the Station COS assigned to the Authorization Code is applied for this call only. Conditions» The Station COS applied for Walking COS is the COS of the station associated with the Authorization Code entered.» Terminating a call also terminates Walking COS. If desired, Walking COS may be reactivated to place another call. Note that Flash may be used to regain CO/IP dial tone should a wrong number be dialed. Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 Class of Service - page 2-120

149 DID Call Wait DID Call Wait Description The DID Call Wait feature can be used to automatically notify a station user who is busy on another call of an incoming DID call. Operation To assign a {DID CALL WAIT} flexible button: [PGM] + [FLEX] + [PGM] + [34] + [SAVE] To activate/deactivate DID Call Wait: 1. Press the {DID CALL WAIT} flexible button. 2. Dial [1] or [0] to turn on or off. 3. Press [SAVE]. -or- 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature dial code [34]. 3. Dial [1] or [0] to turn on or off. 4. Press [SAVE]. Conditions» This feature applies only to IP keysets.» A station receives DID Call Wait indication only when it is in a busy state.» If a station doesn t answer the DID call within the DID/DISA No Answer Timer limitation, the call is forwarded to the Attendant.» If a station has several DID calls that are waiting, the last incoming call is represented by the indication.» The DID Call Wait feature requires the station to have an associated CO Line button. Related Features Direct Inward Dialing Hardware IP Keyset

150 2-124 Differential Ring Differential Ring Description Differential Ring allows any one of 14 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to an IP Keyset. When the IP Keyset receives an incoming call, the selected Ring signal is provided over the speaker. Different selections are assigned for Intercom and CO/IP calls. Four of the tones are initially stored in the phone s permanent memory. Ten tones are stored in the system s memory. Four of the ten can be downloaded into the phone for use as the 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th ring tone options In this way, a user can differentiate which IP Keyset is ringing in a given area and what type of call (Intercom or External) is being presented to the station. Operation The System automatically uses the assigned Ring type. To select a Ring Tone from the phone s memory: 1. Press [PGM] button and dial [1] to select "Ring" option. 2. Dial [1] or [2] to select Station or CO Ring Type: [1] = STN Ring Type [2] = CO Ring Type 3. Dial 1-8 to select the desired Ring Tone. 4. Press [SAVE]. To download a ring tone from system memory: 1. Press [PGM] and dial [1] to select "Ring" option. 2. Dial [5] for ring tone download. 3. Dial a ring tone option location Dial Ring Selection 0-9. Tone sounds. 5. Press [SAVE] to download. Conditions» Ring type selection is only available to digital keysets.» If a CO line call is routed to a station, and the ring type of the CO line is different than the station, the CO Distinct Ring Type is used. An Intercom call will likewise use the Intercom Distinct Ring Type. Hardware IP Keyset

151 Direct Inward System Access Direct Inward System Access Description Each CO/IP path may be assigned for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) service, which then allows an incoming caller to gain access to the system resources and/or features. Upon answering the outside call, the system will provide the user intercom dial tone or route the call based on the Customer Call Route VSF Auto Attendant announcement (CCR VSF AA) settings. The DISA caller may then access the desired resource using dial codes. If an Authorization Code is required for DISA access, when the system answers an incoming DISA call, DND Warning tone is provided to indicate an Authorization Code must be entered. Operation Incoming call subject to DISA service: 1. Recognize incoming call. 2. Answer call and connect caller to Intercom dial tone or VSF AA announcement. 3. Process call based on received digits/programming. DISA Caller: To access the system s resources from an external party: 1. Place call to DISA facility of the system. 2. At receipt of Intercom dial tone/vsf AA announcement, dial as desired. If DND Warning tone sounds, enter an Authorization Code.

152 2-126 Direct Inward System Access Conditions» Each CO/IP path is separately assigned for DISA operation during Day, Night and/or Timed system operation mode. DISA operation is active only when the system is in the assigned operating mode(s).» DISA callers can be routed to a VSF Auto Attendant announcement in place of Intercom dial tone. The announcement can be associated with a CCR Table entry or assigned to disconnect after playback [#].» A DISA caller can be required to enter an Authorization Code to access the system s external outgoing resources, facilities or features. If required, the caller is permitted to retry entry of a valid Authorization Code based on the DISA Retry count.» DISA callers are subject to COS dialing restrictions. If Authorization Codes are required and the code entered matches a Station Authorization Code, the station s COS will apply. Otherwise, the assigned DISA COS will apply. In both cases, the CO/IP COS for the outgoing path will be active.» The system will disconnect an outgoing DISA call if the Unsupervised Conference timer expires or disconnect supervision is received. A disconnect warning tone is provided 15 seconds prior to disconnect.» If a DISA caller encounters a system All Lines Busy, busy tone sounds for five seconds before ICM Dial tone is again presented and the DISA caller may try another call.» LEDs associated with the DISA CO Line appearance will provide normal status indications at all stations except the Attendants. The LED at an Attendant will flutter.» An IP Keyset user can only receive a DISA call with an available CO/IP appearance button. Related Features Authorization Codes - page 2-16 Caller Controlled Routing - page 2-50 Class of Service - page Day/Night/Timed System Service Mode Unsupervised Conference - page 2-110

153 Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Description When a flexible button on an IP Keyset or IP DSS/BLF Console is assigned as a Direct Station Select {DSS} button, it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field. Illumination of the LED indicates the in-use status of the associated station or system facility. Operation Operation of this feature is automatic for assigned flexible buttons. Conditions» A station receiving ICM ringing is considered busy and the associated station LED on all other stations will flash.» A station receiving ICM ringing will receive visual indication by a flashing LED of the flexible button associated with the calling station.» When a station receives a Camp On, the LED of a DSS flexible button associated with the calling station will flash.» The station is considered busy when: in use receiving ICM Ring at an IP Keyset receiving any ring at an SLT Related Features Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page 2-142

154 2-128 Display Security Display Security Description This feature allows a user to program a station/system speed bin so that dialed numbers are not shown in the IP Keyset display. Operation When entering a number in a speed dial bin: Enter [ ] as the first digit of the number to enable speed dial Display Security for the number. Conditions» The number in the Speed Dial bin is displayed when programming the number in Speed Dial.» Dialed numbers are included in SMDR information, even if Display Security is in use.» Display security is provided on CO calls, including call transfers and recalls.» [ ] in any other digit position than the first will enable Pulse to Tone Switchover. Related Features Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page 2-210

155 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Description A station that is enabled to use the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature, can use the DND mode to eliminate CO/IP Line Ringing, ICM Calls, Transfers, and Paging Announcements. Operation To activate DND: Press [DND] while in an idle status. The [DND] LED lights steady. To remove DND: Press [DND] while in an idle status. The [DND] LED extinguishes. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate DND: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial DND feature code [553]. A stutter dial tone is received. To remove DND: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial DND feature code [553]. A dial tone is received. Conditions» A station that is not enabled to use DND will receive an error tone if [DND] is pressed.» Pressing [DND] while the telephone is ringing eliminates the ringing when DND is allowed. In this case, the caller will hear a DND tone if the call is an intercom call. The caller will hear a continuous Ring Back Tone if the call is a CO/IP call.» An Attendant can override the stations in DND by using Intrusion.» DND service is not available to Attendants.» Only the Secretary of an Executive/Secretary pair can override the Executive s station in DND by using Camp On.

156 2-130 Do Not Disturb» Station (A) is preset forwarded or manually forwarded to Station (B). If Station (B) is in DND, then the incoming call will bypass Station (B) and forward to the next station in the Call Forward chain. If Station (B) is the last station in the chain, then the incoming call will ring at Station (A) until answered.» Transfer and Hold Recalls will override DND.» The Attendant may cancel DND for an individual station or a group of stations.» A station in DND is out-of-service for calls to a station group.» When calling a station in DND, the IP keyset will indicate the DND status of the called station. Related Features Attendant Cancel Feature - page 2-36 Attendant Intrusion - page 2-37 Call Forward - page 2-82 Call Forward, Preset - page 2-88 DND Override - page 2-24 Executive/Secretary Pairs - page DND - One Time DND Description A busy station, which is receiving an off-hook muted ring, can press [DND], to activate DND and terminate the off-hook muted ring signal. When the station goes to the idle status, the DND is cancelled and the [DND] LED is extinguished. Operation To activate the One Time DND while on a call: 1. Press [DND]. 2. The [DND] LED lights. Station is in DND to all calls, even alerting. Deactivation (System): When the station returns to idle, DND is disabled and the LED extinguishes.

157 Door Open Conditions» When a station goes to the idle status, [DND] LED is extinguished.» When the station presses [DND] while in an idle status, normal DND conditions apply.» Recalling can override One Time DND except for ICM hold recall.» An Attendant can override the stations in One Time DND by using Camp On or intrusion.» Attendants do not have One Time DND service.» One Time DND erases a Camped-On condition.» A station receives a muted CO/IP ring while it is connected to a CO/IP line or ICM call. If the station presses [DND], the muted CO/IP ring disappears, the LED of {CO} button flashes, and the CO calling party hears a Ring Back tone continuously. Related Features Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 Do Not Disturb - page Hardware IP Keyset Door Open Description The Telenium IP System hardware is equipped with two relays (MFIM systems) or four relays (MFIME systems) that activate External Control Contacts. The contacts can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open function. When used as a Door Open contact, the contact is connected to a Door Lock release mechanism. When assigned stations receive the Door Bell signal, the user dials the Door Open code to activate the contact. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {DOOR OPEN} button. Operation To assign a {DOOR OPEN} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [# ] + contact number + [SAVE]

158 2-132 Emergency Call To activate the Door Open contacts: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the Door Open code [# ] + dial the contact number (1-2 for MFIM or 1-4 for MFIME). 3. Hang up handset and return to idle -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {DOOR OPEN} flexible button. 3. Hang up handset, return to idle. Hardware MFIM contact connected to Door Lock release mechanism. Emergency Call Description Users can dial an emergency number regardless of COS dialing limitations. Conditions» A station assigned to STA COS 7 (Intercom only Mode) can place an emergency call by using a CO appearance key or CO line access code.» If a dialed number matches a number in the Emergency Code Table, the toll check is not applied by the system. Executive/Secretary Pairs Description Executive/Secretary pairs can be defined in the system database (up to 10 pairs for MFIM systems and up to 36 pairs for MFIME systems). By pressing [DND], the Executive activates Unconditional Call Forward for all Intercom and transferred calls, sending calls to the Secretary. Operation To activate Executive/Secretary Forward from the Executive IP Keyset: Press [DND] to toggle Executive/Secretary Forward.

159 Executive/Secretary Pairs Conditions» One Executive can have multiple Secretaries and a Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives.» If the Secretary station(s) is busy, ICM busy tone will be received by the calling party.» ICM calls routed to the Secretary station will always signal in the tone ring mode.» The Secretary can transfer and Camp On calls to the Executive, overriding the DND state at the Executive by pressing [ ].» A chain can be constructed by assigning the Secretary of one pair as the Executive of another. Although a chain is allowed, a Loop-back is not permitted.» If one Executive has multiple Secretaries and the first Secretary is busy, calls are forwarded to the Secretary of the Executive s next pair.» If an Executive activates Call Forward to a station other than the Secretary, calls will follow the activated Call Forward.» If, when the Executive is in DND, the Secretary is busy or in DND, Camp On, Call Transfers, Message Wait and CLI/IP Message Waits will be left at the Secretary, or, for a chain, the last Secretary in the chain. Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Call Transfer - page 2-94 Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 CPI Message Wait - page DND Override - page 2-24 Do Not Disturb - page Message Wait / Call Back - page 2-159

160 2-134 Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible Numbering Plan Description User access to the Telenium IP System resources and features is accomplished through feature codes or IP Keyset feature buttons. The feature codes are defined in the system s Flexible Numbering Plan. The Flexible Numbering Plan may be modified in Admin programming. Operation The system implements feature activation based on a Flexible Numbering Plan. Conditions» Features codes can be one to three digits in length.» While programming, conflicts in the Numbering Plan are not allowed. The existing non-conflicting Numbering Plan is used until correctly updated. Related Features Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan - page Group Listening Description All IP Keysets have built in speakerphones. If allowed in Admin programming, users may employ the speaker to allow others to monitor a call while they use the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables a group of people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation. Operation While on a call using the handset: Press [SPEAKER]. The speaker activates and its microphone is muted while the handset is off-hook.

161 Headset Compatibility Conditions» While talking using the speakerphone, lifting the handset will turn off the speakerphone. To activate Group Listening, [SPEAKER] must be pressed while the handset is off-hook.» While in Group Listening Mode, pressing [MUTE] causes the transmit path from the handset to be muted. However, the distant end is still heard over both the handset receiver and the station speaker.» If full speakerphone operation is desired while in Group Listening Mode, place the handset on-hook. Related Features Mute - page Speakerphone - page Hardware IP Keyset Headset Compatibility Description An industry standard headset can be connected to an IP Keyset in place of or in conjunction with the handset. The station is then programmed for Headset operation mode. In the Headset mode, pressing [SPEAKER] connects the audio path to the Headset instead of to the Speakerphone. When the Headset mode is active, the device (speaker/headset) to receive ring can be defined. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button to select the Headset/Speakerphone mode. The {HEADSET MODE SELECT} flexible button may be used to change the mode of the station operation. Operation To assign a {HEADSET MODE SELECT} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [61] + [SAVE] To change the operation mode of the station: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial feature code [61]. The Headset mode is displayed on the LCD. 3. Dial [1] for Speakerphone or [0] for Headset.

162 2-136 Hold To change the device to receive ring: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial User Program feature code [62]. Ring setting is displayed on LCD. 3. Dial [1] for Speaker only, [2] for Both, or [3] for Headset only. To place/answer calls in the Headset mode: Press [SPEAKER] to go on/off-hook. Conditions» The Intercom Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Private) can be set in headset mode as with the Speakerphone mode.» Station will still receive Page announcements over the IP Keyset speaker.» When a station is in "Headset" mode, the system will monitor hookswitch status. If a station lifts the handset, voice is connected to the handset.» If an E&MIC Headset is used with IP7000 series phones, the PGM 113, Btn 11 option must be set to ON for the designated station to be allowed to enable the use of the headset via Station PGM 6 option 1 programming. If the PGM 113, Btn 11 option is set to OFF, the user receives "handset mode only" despite selecting "Headset" in the Station PGM 6 option 1. Hardware IP Keyset and industry-standard headset are required. Hold Exclusive Hold Description CO/IP lines can be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system will be unable to access the CO/IP line. Only the station placing the CO/IP line on Exclusive hold can access the held CO/IP line. When a user places a CO/IP call on Exclusive Hold, the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is started. If the timer expires, the held call will recall the station for the I-Hold recall time. If the call remains unanswered, the call is placed on System Hold and the Attendant receives recall. If unanswered after expiration of the Attendant Recall Timer, the CO/IP call is disconnected and the appropriate circuits return to idle.

163 Hold Operation To place a CO/IP line on Exclusive Hold: Press [HOLD] once or twice (depending on Hold Preference programming). The CO/IP line button LED will flash. To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding keyset: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the CO/IP line flexible button, -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial [8#] and the CO/IP line number. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To place a CO/IP line on Exclusive Hold from an SLT: Briefly depress the hookswitch. To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding SLT: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Held CO/IP call access code [8 ]. Conditions» The flexible button LED for a CO/IP line placed on Exclusive hold will flash at the originator station. At all other stations, the CO flexible button LED lights steady on.» All transferred calls are placed in Exclusive Hold.» The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} flexible buttons provides the normal CO Line status indications.» If the default of System Hold is specified as the Hold Preference in admin programming, then to activate Executive Hold press [HOLD] twice. If Executive Hold is specified as the Hold Preference in admin programming, then to activate Executive Hold press [HOLD] once. Related Features CO/IP to CO/IP Call Transfer - page 2-96 Exclusive Hold - page 2-136

164 2-138 Hold System Hold Description CO/IP lines can be placed in a waiting state so that other stations in the system can access the CO/IP line. The station attempting to access the held CO/IP line must be assigned access to the CO/IP line. When a user places a CO/IP call on System Hold, the System Hold Recall Timer is started. If the timer expires, the held call will recall the station for the I-Hold recall time. If the call remains unanswered, the call is placed on System Hold and the Attendant receives recall. If unanswered after expiration of the Attendant Recall Timer, the CO/IP call is disconnected and the appropriate circuits return to idle. Operation To place a call on System Hold: Press [HOLD] once or twice (depending on Hold Preference programming). The CO/IP line button LED will flash. To access a call from System Hold by any telephone user in the system: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the CO/IP line flexible button, -or- 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial [8#] and the CO/IP line number. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To place a CO/IP line on System Hold from an SLT: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial the System Hold feature code [560]. To access a call from System Hold by any telephone user in the system: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial [8#] and the CO/IP line number. Conditions» The LED of CO/IP line flexible buttons for the CO/IP line placed on system hold will flash at the originator station when the CO/IP line is on system hold.» A CO/IP line on System Hold can be retrieved by any telephone allowed access to the line using a CO flexible button or code dialing.

165 Hold 2-139» The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} flexible buttons provides the normal CO Line status indications.» If the default of System Hold is specified as the Hold Preference in admin programming, then to activate System Hold press [HOLD] once. If Executive Hold is specified as the Hold Preference in admin programming, then to activate System Hold press [HOLD] twice. Related Features Exclusive Hold - page Automatic Hold Description While on an active CO line call, the system will automatically place the call on hold if you press the a {DSS} button, [CONF] key, etc. If on an IP call, the call will automatically be placed on hold if you press the DSS key. In addition, the station can be programmed to support CO/IP to CO/IP Automatic Hold. In this case, when the user of an IP Keyset selects a CO/IP line while on a CO/IP call, the selected CO/IP line is accessed and the previous CO/IP call is placed on the preferred hold selection. Operation To use Automatic Hold while on a CO/IP call: Press the desired {CO/IP} flexible button the station user is connected with. The selected CO/IP and the previous CO/IP call is placed on Preferred Hold automatically. Conditions» The CO/IP lines that are put on Hold by this feature will follow the Hold Preference.» There is no limit to the amount of lines that can be put on Hold by this feature. Related Features Exclusive Hold - page System Hold - page Hardware IP Keyset

166 2-140 Hot Desk Hot Desk Description IP Keysets, see hardware requirements below, can be assigned as Hot Desk phones allowing users (agents) to login with the Telenium IP. The Hot Desk will become active and will take on the attributes defined for the agent's station number. When the agent logs off, the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive and the agent s calls are forwarded to the user entered destination. A different agent may then login through the inactive Hot Desk phone. Operation IP Keyset To login through an inactive Hot Desk: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button, 2. Dial [*] + [0]. 3. Dial the user s station number and authorization code. Agent is logged in. To logout through the active Hot Desk: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial [*] + [*] or press the {AGENT LOGOUT} Flex button. 3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to select call forward destination for agent calls, speed dial, joined mobile phone, VSF, or VM group. 4. Press the [SAVE] button. Conditions» The Hot Desk phone can be programmed to automatically log-out an active user if no action has been taken by the agent for the Auto Log-out timer.» An active (logged in) agent can login to another inactive Hot Desk. This will however, log the agent off of the previously active Hot Desk.» A user may only logout from the agent's active Hot Desk phone. Attempting to logout using a different Hot Desk phone will return error tone.» The Flex button map of the Hot Desk station is fixed and will not take on the configuration associated with the agent's station.

167 Howling Tone 2-141» When logged off, the agent's active database, including the following items, are saved. Station Number Station Attributes, PGM CO Routing, Ring assignments, DID routing, etc. Voice Mail Hunt Group assignment» The number of Hot Desk phones and Hot Desk users is limited to the system capacity. Each Hot Desk phone and Hot Desk user (agent) requires a station channel in the system.» To identify the station number, only station authorization codes may be used for Hot Desk login.» An ACD Agent must use the Agent Login procedure as defined in under the ACD feature description. Related Features ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Call Forward Hardware IP Keyset 24D, 24DH, 7008D, 7024D, and 7024LD Howling Tone Description When an SLT station goes off-hook and does not initiate dialing in the Dial tone timer duration, delays dialing between digits in access of the inter-digit time or stays off-hook at the completion of activating a feature or program, the station will receive howling tone as an error indication and the call attempt will be abandoned. In order to complete the call, the user must return to on-hook state and restart the call. Operation The system will deliver howling tone automatically, as required. Conditions» Howling Tone is sent after a period (about three seconds) of error tone.» Lock-out occurs when howling tone starts. Related Features Intercom Lock-Out - page 2-145

168 2-142 Intercom Intercom Intercom Call (ICM Call) Description A non-blocking ICM call is available to all stations in the system. Users may place an intercom call to other stations in the system by dialing applicable digits as defined in the system s Numbering plans. Operation To place an intercom call: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to receive ICM dial tone. 2. Dial station number or press {DSS} flexible button. 3. For ring-back tone, await answer, -or- For Intercom splash-tone, speak and await answer. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To place an intercom call: 1. Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone. 2. Dial station number. 3. For ring-back tone, await answer, -or- For Intercom splash-tone, speak and await answer. Conditions» To adjust Voice Gain, use [VOLUME UP]/[VOLUME DOWN] Keys.» Intercom Dial tone will time-out if action is not taken within Dial Tone Time or if the time between digits exceeds the Inter-digit Timer. An error tone sounds if a time-out occurs.» ICM Dial tone is removed after dialing the first digit.» If the called station is busy, Intercom Busy tone is provided for the Busy Tone time (seven seconds) then, Error tone is sent by the system. The caller may disconnect or activate a feature such as Message Wait/Callback.» For IP Keyset users, consecutive Intercom calls can be placed without the need to regain ICM dial tone (no need to hang up) between calls. The user simply presses another {DSS} flexible button.

169 Intercom Call On Hold 2-143» An Intercom call to a station in the HF answerback or Voice Announce mode (H or P Intercom Signaling Mode) is not considered answered unless the called station goes off-hook, lifts the handset, or presses [SPEAKER]. Related Features Intercom Signaling Mode - page Speakerphone - page Intercom Call On Hold Description While on an active ICM Call, users of IP Keysets can place the ICM Call on hold. The held station will receive the assigned Music-on-Hold. The call is placed on Exclusive Hold and will recall the holding station after the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer expires. Operation To place an active ICM on hold: Press [HOLD] or [ICM]. The [ICM] button LED flashes at the exclusive hold rate. ICM dial tone sounds. To retrieve the held ICM call: Press [ICM] or the {DSS} flexible button associated to the held station. The [ICM] LED will be on and the ICM call is connected. Conditions» Either the originating or the answering station may put an ICM call on hold.» Only one ICM call may be placed on hold at any time.» If the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer expires and the holding station is busy (on CO/IP or ICM call), then the timer resets and starts over.» The holding station receives Music-On-Hold, if assigned. Related Features Exclusive Hold - page Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Exclusive Hold - page Mute - page Hardware IP Keyset

170 2-144 Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling Description A user can change the signaling mode of an Intercom call from Tone ring to Voice announce or Voice announce to Tone ring. Operation IP Keyset To change the ICM Signaling mode: 1. Place intercom call 2. Dial [#]. ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or Tone ring to Voice announce. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To change the ICM Signaling mode: 1. Place intercom call as normal. 2. Dial [#]. ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or Tone ring to Voice announce. Conditions» The ICM Signaling mode can not be changed when an Intercom call is placed to a Linked Pair station.» If the signaling mode is changed, the call is not subject to Call Forward, No Answer.» The signaling mode for a specific Intercom call can only be changed once and cannot be changed back to the original signaling mode.» Changing the signaling mode does not affect privacy at the called station. Related Features Intercom Signaling Mode Linked Pair Stations

171 Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Lock-Out Description If the user takes no action after going off-hook for the period of time set on the Dial Tone Timer or fails to dial an additional digit within the Inter-digit timer setting, the station receives an error tone for 30 seconds and is placed in an out-of-service status (locked-out). The LEDs of associated {DSS} flexible buttons flutter rapidly to indicate the out-of-service state. For IP Keyset users, if the [SPEAKER] is used, the station will receive error tone for 30 second and then automatically return to idle. Operation If the user is locked out, go on-hook and then off-hook before trying to place the call again. Conditions» If a station is assigned Howling Tone, an Error tone is presented for 30 secs, then 30 secs of Howling tone followed by lock-out and silence.» Upon Lock-Out, an error tone is presented to the station.» Lock-Out occurs upon expiration of the ICM Dial Tone Timer, if the first digit has not been dialed.» Lock-Out occurs upon expiration of the Inter-Digit Timer, if the number has not been completely dialed.» An error tone is presented for 30 seconds and then a howling tone is presented for 30 seconds, if that feature has been selected. After that, no tone is presented.» If station has a Lock-Out appearance key, the key is flashing. When the key is pressed, the LCD display shows that the station is locked-out. Related Features Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page 2-142

172 2-146 Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Signaling Mode Description Each IP Keyset can select the signaling mode used for incoming ICM calls while the station is idle. Three signaling modes are available. H - Call announcing with handsfree answer-back P - Call announcing with privacy T - Tone ringing When an ICM call is received the user receives splash tone followed by the ICM callers voice. The user may respond to the caller without the need to Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. When an ICM call is received the user receives splash tone followed by the ICM callers voice. To respond the user must lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. An ICM call will cause the IP Keyset to provide the audible ICM ring tone. The user must lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to answer Operation To change ICM Signaling Mode: 1. Press [PGM]. The [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Dial User Program code [13]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code [1] for H, [2] for T, [3] for P. 4. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds and the station returns to idle. Conditions» Message Waiting/Callback/Calls Forward/ATD Override will ring in the tone mode, regardless of ICM Signaling Mode selected by the user.» The ICM signaling Mode Selection does not affect voice announcements from Internal/All Call Paging.» ICM Answer Mode is 'T' Position by default, and ICM Answer Mode should be protected from power failure. Related Features Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Paging - page Hardware IP Keyset

173 Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Step Call Description When busy tone sounds on a dialed Intercom call, the user may place a call to another station by dialing the last digit of the station number. The system replaces the last digit of the previously dialed busy station with the dialed digit and places an Intercom call to the new station number. Operation To activate a call, while receiving busy on a dialed Intercom call: Dial a digit other than the last digit of the busy station s intercom number. Conditions» If the user dials the last digit of the busy station, Camp On will be activated.» After receiving busy tone, if the user takes no action for the Busy Tone timer, the system will start the Intercom Lock-out procedure. Related Features Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Intercom Lock-Out - page 2-145

174 2-148 Intercom Call On Hold Intercom Transfer Description Users can transfer an active Intercom call to other stations in the Telenium IP system. Intercom calls can be transferred after announcing the call (screened) or without announcing the call (unscreened). The Intercom station is placed on Exclusive Hold. The Transfer Recall Timer is initiated and, if this timer expires before the Intercom call is answered, the call will recall the station until answered or abandoned. Operation To perform an unscreened ICM transfer, while on an ICM call: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Dial Station to receive call. 3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. -or- 1. Press {DSS} flexible button for the desired station. 2. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. While on a Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Dial Station to receive call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. -or- 1. Press {DSS} flexible button for the desired station. 2. Hang up, return to idle.

175 Intercom Call On Hold SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To perform a screened transfer of an active Intercom call: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial Station to receive call. 3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call. 4. Hang up, return to idle. While on an Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer: 1. Briefly depress the hookswitch. 2. Dial Station to receive call. 3. Hang up, return to idle. Conditions» When the station initiating the transfer hangs up, in some cases the line will immediately recall the station. This is true in the following cases: If you hang up before completing the dialing of a station number. If you hang up when the transfer isn t successful, e.g., when you attempt to transfer to a busy/dnd/invalid station.» The [ICM] button provides an appearance for the transferred station. The LED indicates status and pressing the button reconnects you to the station.» If the receiving station is busy, the transferring station may camp the call on to the busy station. Refer to "Call Waiting / Camp On" on page 2-98.» A station in DND or out-of-service cannot receive a transfer, and such attempts will result in an error tone. Related Features Call Transfer - page 2-94 Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 Do Not Disturb - page Exclusive Hold - page Exclusive Hold - page 2-136

176 2-150 IP Dialing IP Dialing Description If allowed, users may place calls using an IP path. The system accepts user dialed digits as the IP address for the called party. When dialing an IP call, the asterisk ( ) is used as the "dot" between bytes of the IP address. Operation To place an IP Call: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press {IP GRP} flexible button or dial CO/IP line/group access code for IP access. 3. Dial [xxx xxx xxx xxx]. Use as the period in the IP address. 4. Press [#] to complete dialing. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To place an IP Call: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Press {IP GRP} flexible button or dial CO/IP line/group access code for IP access. 3. Dial [xxx xxx xxx xxx]. Use as the period in the IP address. 4. Press [#] to complete dialing.

177 ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) AOC (Advice of Charge) Description When ISDN Advice of Charge service is provided from the ISDN, the Telenium IP system will deliver charge information for display in LCD of IP key telephone and include the AOC in SMDR records. AOC is implemented in accordance with ETSI ISDN AOC Specifications. Operation ETSI standard AOC operation is automatic. Conditions» AOC information, which is implemented based on ETSI AOC standard, can be sent during call set-up (AOC-S), during the call (AOC-D) or at the end of call (AOC-E).» This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN or may be a subscription service. Related Features Call Cost Display - page SMDR - page Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation Description The Telenium IP system receives calling party identification in the ISDN call Setup message, CLIP-Calling Line Identification Presentation. The answering party identification, which may be different than the called party, is received in the ISDN connect message, COLP-Connected Line Identification Presentation. When provided, the LCD of IP Keysets can display the identification and the identification is included in call records. The received identification may be separately output over a selected serial port. IP Keyset Display: LINE RINGING CLI

178 2-152 ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) CLI Serial Output: Record at ring start: AA : BBBBBBBBCCC Record at ring stop: AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE) -> FFF Record at answer: AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE) -> FFF Where: AA ISDN CO line number BB B Line Identification received CCC Called station DD D Speed Dial name EEE Speed Dial bin number FFF Answering station The system also compares the identification to the names assigned to Speed Dial bins. If a match exists, the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number, CO/IP Name display. The system will send calling and answering party identification in the appropriate messages to the ISDN based on the database. Identification messages may be restricted, not reported, to the far-end user. Calling Line Identification Restriction and Connected Line Identification Restriction may be enabled in the system database or by {CLIR} and {COLR} flexible buttons. Operation Operation of this feature is automatic. To program {CLIR} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX}+ [PGM] + [81] + [SAVE] To program {COLR} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX}+ [PGM] + [82] + [SAVE] To activate CLIR or COLR, before placing or answering an ISDN call: Press the {CLIR} or {COLR} flexible button. Hardware ISDN Gateway Module

179 ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Keypad Facility Description The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element (IE) may enable the user to activate certain ISDN services (e.g., Off-Net Forward). To access this facility, the station must be enabled and have a flexible button for {KEYPAD FACILITY}. When activated, the digits dialed by user are sent in the Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE. Operation To program {KEYPAD FACILITY} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [89] + [SAVE] To activate the keypad facility while on an ISDN line: 1. Press the {KEYPAD FACILITY} flexible button. 2. Dial desired digits, other actions disable Keypad facility. Conditions» This feature can be activated or deactivated only after a CO line (ISDN) is seized.» Once activated, the system will continue to send dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE messages regardless of ISDN messages. Thus, in the connected mode, DTMF tones are not sent to the connected party.» If Speed Dial bin includes [MSG] button as the first entry, the remaining digits in the Speed Dial number will be sent in a Keypad Facility IE. The station using the Speed Dial must have Keypad Facility enabled and the call must be placed on an ISDN line.» This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN or may be a subscription service.» The system can handle only a single Call Reference; services, which require handling of two simultaneous Call References, are not supported. Related Features Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Hardware IP Keyset

180 2-154 ISDN Supplementary Services ISDN Supplementary Services In many cases, the ISDN service provider offers enhanced services, to which a user may subscribe. The Telenium IP system allows access to these ISDN "Supplementary Services" implemented under the ETSI regime as described below. Call Hold/Retrieve Description With the ISDN HOLD supplementary service, users can place an active ISDN B-channel on Hold in the ISDN. This allows the user to place another call on the channel and retrieve the held call. Any recall is dependent upon the ISDN service. Operation To hold the current ISDN call: 1. Press [FLASH] during conversation. 2. Press [HOLD]. To make a new call by using the same ISDN channel: 1. Press [FLASH]. 2. Press the {CO} flexible button. To retrieve the held call during conversation: Press [HOLD]. The current call goes on hold and the held call is retrieved. To retrieve the held call after hanging up the current conversation: Press the {CO} flexible button that is flashing.

181 ISDN Supplementary Services Conditions» ISDN Supplementary services are implemented employing the ETSI Keypad protocol.» ISDN Call Hold/Retrieve feature is available only after an audio path has been established between the station user and the external party.» An ISDN line with an active "Supplementary Service" cannot be transferred to other stations and a call on ISDN Hold can only be retrieved by the station that placed the call on ISDN Hold.» When a call is on hold, the ISDN line LED will flash at the station that placed the ISDN call on hold. All appearances of the ISDN line at other stations will indicate a busy (On) LED status.» If the user, which placed the ISDN call on hold, places a new call on the ISDN line, the associated button will indicate a busy (On) status. Related Features ISDN Supplementary Services - page Hardware ISDN line IP Keyset Broker Call Description A user may place a call on Hold in the ISDN and place a second call on the same ISDN B-channel. The user may then alternate between the calls to engage in a private conversation with one party while the other party is placed on Hold in the ISDN. Operation To hold the current ISDN call: 1. Press [FLASH] during conversation. 2. Press [HOLD]. To make a new call by using the same ISDN channel: 1. Press [FLASH]. 2. Press the {CO} flexible button. To alternate between the ISDN calls: Press [HOLD]. The current ISDN call goes on hold and the previously held ISDN call is retrieved.

182 2-156 ISDN Supplementary Services Conditions» ISDN Supplementary services are implemented employing the ETSI Keypad protocol.» ISDN Broker Call feature is available only after an audio path has been established between the station user and the external party.» An ISDN line with an active "Supplementary Service" cannot be transferred to other stations and a call on ISDN Hold can only be retrieve by the station that placed the call on ISDN Hold.» When a call is on hold, the ISDN line LED will flash at the station that placed the ISDN call on hold. All other appearances of the ISDN line at other stations will indicate a busy (On) status.» When the user, which placed the ISDN call on hold, places the new call on the ISDN line, the associated button will indicate a busy (On) status. Related Features ISDN Supplementary Services - page Hardware ISDN line IP Keyset ISDN Three-Party Conference Description A user may establish a three-way conference call, employing ISDN three-party conference service, if subscribed. The three-party conference service connects all parties to the originator s ISDN B-channel. Operation To establish an ISDN three-party conference: 1. Press [FLASH]. 2. Press [CONF] when the call is in Supplementary Hold and the call is in conference. To place an ISDN three-party conference on Hold: 1. Press [FLASH]. 2. Press [HOLD] during three-party conference.

183 ISDN Supplementary Services Conditions» ISDN Supplementary services are implemented employing the ETSI Keypad protocol.» ISDN Broker Call feature is available only after an audio path has been established between the station user and the external party.» An ISDN line with an active "Supplementary Service" cannot be transferred to other stations and a call on ISDN Hold can only be retrieved by the station that placed the call on ISDN Hold.» When a call is on hold, the ISDN line LED will flash at the station that placed the ISDN call on hold. All other appearances of the ISDN line at other stations will indicate a busy (On) status.» When the user, which placed the ISDN call on hold, places the new call on the ISDN line, the associated button will indicate a busy (On) status.» Other stations or CO lines in the system cannot be joined in an ISDN Three-Party Conference. Related Features ISDN Supplementary Services - page Hardware ISDN line IP Keyset

184 2-158 Last Number Redial Last Number Redial Description The last dialed number is stored (up to 48 digits) in the station's Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer. You may use the system to redial one of the last dialed numbers without redialing individual digits of the entire number. IP Keysets with an LCD automatically store the last 10 dialed numbers in a directory. You may select a number from the directory and redial the number by pressing only a few buttons. Operation To use Last Number Redial: 1. If desired, lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [REDIAL], -or Press [SPEED] and then press [ ]. 3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to select the desired number. 4. Press [SAVE] or [REDIAL] to dial the selected number. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To use Last Number Redial from an SLT: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the LNR feature dial code [552]. Conditions» The last number redial directory allows the number stored to be a duplicate.» When the CO/IP line used for the original call is busy, an idle CO/IP line from the same group is seized and the last dialed number is dialed.» If you use Last Number Redial while the Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR) is activated, the ACNR is canceled and the last dialed number is redialed.» If AC power is lost, the Last Number Redial buffer will be erased.» Manually dialing a Flash during a CO call will cause only those numbers dialed after the Flash to be re-dialed for a Last Number Redial number.» Last Number Redial applies to VoIP calls as well as to all CO line calls.

185 Message Wait / Call Back Related Features Save Number Redial (SNR) - page Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Message Wait / Call Back Description A station can activate a Message Wait indication requesting a Call Back when calling a station that does not answer or is in DND. A station may receive a Message Wait from any number of other stations in the system. The station receiving the Message Wait can return the call using [CALLBK]. When a busy station is called, the user may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call Back. When the called station returns to idle, the system signals the initiating station with Callback ring. When the user answers, the now idle station is called. Operation To leave a Message Wait or Call Back request: While receiving ring back tone or no response on a call announce (H or P mode), while receiving DND tone, or while receiving a busy signal: 1. Press [CALLBK]. Confirmation tone sounds. 2. Hang up. The [CALLBK] LED flashes at the called station. To return the Message Wait (Call Back) to the first station on list: 1. Press the flashing [CALLBK] button. The message contents summary will display. ST CL VS VM FS MS Dial [1] to select Station Messages. [1] = ST: Station Message Wait [2] = CL: CLI Message Wait [3] = VS: VSF Message Wait [4] = VM: Commercial Voice Mail Message Wait [5] = FS: PathFinder IP Message Wait [6] = MS: SMS Message Wait 3. Press [CALLBK] to call back the 1st station in the list or press [ ] to remove the first station number in the list.

186 2-160 Message Wait / Call Back SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To leave a Message Wait or Call Back request: While receiving ring back tone or no response on a call announce (H or P mode), DND tone, or a busy signal: 1. Dial Message Wait/Call Back feature code [556]. 2. Hang up. Message Wait Lamp, if equipped, flashes. To retrieve a Station Message Wait: Dial Message Wait/Call Back Answer feature code [557]. To respond to a Call back recall: After a previously busy station with a message wait becomes available, and they call back: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Previously busy station is called. Conditions» The call back will always ring in the tone mode regardless of the intercom signaling mode switch.» A station can leave only one callback request.» The [CALLBK] LED continues to flash until all Message Wait and Call Back requests are serviced.» If a station attempts to leave a message and the system Message Wait queue is full, the station receives an ICM busy tone.» A Message Wait Reminder Tone can be enabled to remind the user of messages waiting.» A station which has activated the call forward feature can leave a message wait indication at another station. When the called station returns the call, the call rings at the station where forwarding is directed.» A Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station, even if that station is in a call forwarding state.» An IP Keyset with LCD may call back to station(s) that left messages in any desired order, or the normal "oldest first" order.

187 Message Wait Reminder Tone 2-161» Placing a normally dialed Intercom call to a station will cancel any existing Message Wait from that station.» A station without LCD may call back to station(s) in the oldest order by dialing {station message wait retrieve} code. Related Features CPI Message Wait - page Message Wait Reminder Tone - page Message Wait Reminder Tone Description In addition to the [CALLBK] LED, IP Keysets can be sent a tone as a periodic reminder to the user of message waits in queue. This tone is sent to the station only while idle and is heard over the speaker. Operation Reminder tone is sent to stations automatically when assigned. Conditions» The interval between tones can be 00 to 60 minutes. A setting of 00 disables the reminder tone.» The reminder tone will continue until all messages have been retrieved.» A station that is busy or in DND will not receive the Message Wait Reminder tone. Related Features Message Wait / Call Back - page Hardware IP Keyset

188 2-162 Mobile Extension Mobile Extension Description A mobile phone may be registered to a station, allowing the mobile phone to place and receive calls through the system. ISDN DID calls are sent to the user's IP Keyset and the active registered mobile phone simultaneously. The mobile phone users can access the facilities of the IP Keyset to place internal and external calls as well as activate/access features. To access system facilities and resources, the mobile user calls the corresponding IP Keyset s DID number. When the call is received, the system matches the CLID to the mobile phone and provides the mobile user with system dial tone. The user may be allowed to register and activate a mobile phone. Operation IP KEYSET To register the mobile phone number: 1. Press the [PGM] button, 2. Dial Dial the mobile phone number. 4. Press the [SAVE] button. To activate/deactivate a registered mobile phone from a user's station: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial Dial 1 to activate or 0 to deactivate. 4. Press the [SAVE] button. To place a call from the mobile extension using the IP Keyset: 1. Dial the DID number of the station, the system will check the CLID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone, 2. Place internal or external call as normal. To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the IP Keyset: 1. Dial "*" while on a Telenium IP call. 2. Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile phone returns to idle. NOTE: the mobile may reconnect by dialing [#].

189 Multiple Voice Mailbox Support SYSTEM Incoming DID calls are sent to active mobile phones automatically. Conditions» When the mobile phone places an external call through Telenium IP, the CLI of the corresponding station is used.» The Mobile Extension features are only supported via system ISDN lines.» Message Wait and Callback can not be activated to a mobile phone.» The Mobile Extension features are not supported over a networked environment.» When an incoming ISDN DID call is received, the system will access an ISDN line and place a call to the mobile phone. Thus, an ISDN line must be available for the system to notify the mobile user of the incoming call. Related Features DND (Do Not Disturb) Message Wait/CallBack Hardware IP Keyset Multiple Voice Mailbox Support Description A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the VM group, the mailbox and password. In addition, IP Keyset users may assign one or more Flex buttons to access a specific mailbox and receive a visual indication (LED flashes) of message status in the mailbox. Operation IP KEYSET To assign a {VMAIL-BOX} Flex button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + VM group + Mailbox (station) number + [SAVE] To access a Voice Mailbox using the {VMAIL-BOX} Flex button; 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the {VMAIL-BOX} Flex button. 3. Dial the Mailbox password.

190 2-164 Mute Conditions» A Flex button can be assigned to access the Mailbox for a Station Group or CO Line Voice Mailbox.» The {VMAIL-BOX} button LED will flash to indicate new messages have been received in the associated mailbox.» The Flex button can not be assigned to access the mailbox of a networked station.» An adjunct Voice Mail may not provide proper notification to the system of message status and thus, the LED may not properly indicate new messages. Related Features External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail VSF Voice Mail Hardware External or VSF Voice Mail IP Keyset Mute Description A keyset can turn off audio transmission from the handset, speakerphone, or headset microphone. Operation To mute the microphone: Press [MUTE]. The [MUTE] LED is on, the microphone (Handset, Speakerphone, Headset) is muted, and connected party receives silence. To activate the microphone: Press the illuminated [MUTE] button. The [MUTE] LED goes off and the microphone is activated, transmitting audio to the connected party. Conditions» Changing from speakerphone to handset or vice versa during a mute condition will eliminate the mute condition and restore transmission.» Selecting another DSS does not change mute status.

191 Networking Features Related Features Group Listening - page Headset Compatibility - page Speakerphone - page Hardware IP Keyset Networking Features Net Call Description A station user can make a call to a station in other systems by dialing only a station number just as an intercom call within the same system. Operation 1. Lift Handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. The system provides a user with a dial tone. 2. Dial the station number of a station in another system, or press the [NET DSS] button for a station in another system. The station seizes the network CO line according to the net routing table, and the system sends a digit stream that is modified by the net routing table. The called party receives a digit stream that is sent by calling party, and analyzes it using the net routing table to determine the correct destination. The called station receives a ringing signal. The LED of [Network CO] button will extinguish when the Net Call is cleared. Conditions» A Net call must be conducted without seizing a CO line.» A user hears an error tone if there is no idle networking path.» Regardless of the ICM mode, the called party receives a ringing signal for the networking call.» When the system detects a fatal error from the network, the system sends the digit stream to the network using the alternate speed dial bin. In this case, the call is not a networking call.» The Net Call is subject to the CO Call Restriction Timer (PGM 180, Btn 14).

192 2-166 Networking Features Net Transfer Description A station user can transfer any kind of CO line call to a station in another system by pressing [TRANS] button and dialing a transferred station such as a call transfer within the same system. There are two kinds of transfer; screened and unscreened transfer. Operation Screened Transfer: 1. Press the [TRANS] button at a station during conversation with a CO line call. The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold. 2. Dial the station number of a station in another system to transfer the call. The station in the other system receives a ring signal. 3. Announce the transfer when the station answers. Both stations can talk with each other, but the held CO is still in Exclusive Hold. 4. Hang up and the outside CO line caller and the transferred station are connected. Unscreened Transfer: 1. Press the [TRANS] button at a station during conversation with a CO line caller. The CO line caller is placed on Exclusive Hold. 2. Dial the station number of a station in another system to transfer the call, and go on-hook. The station in the other system receives a ring signal. The outside CO line caller and the station are connected when the ringing is answered. Conditions» If both of transferred and transferred-to stations are located in the same system, the networking path will be cleared. That is, the transfer call will be setup as intercom call.» The transfer will be canceled when user presses the flashing [CO] or [TRANS] button.» Net Transfer call does not recall to the origination.» User hears an error tone if there is no idle networking path.» Net transfer is not activated to a busy station.

193 Networking Features Identification Service Description Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP): When a user makes a net call and a name of the station is programmed in the Station Name field (Station User Program code 74), the system includes the name of the calling party in one system to the called party in another system. Call Completion Description There are two kinds of call completion: Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS) - After calling a user in another system using a basic call and encountering a busy tone, a station user can be notified when the busy destination of another system becomes idle. If the user wants to make a call to the destination on that notification, the call can be initiated to the destination of another system again. Completion of Calls on No Reply (CCNR) - After calling a user in another system using a basic call and encountering no reply, the caller can be notified when the destination becomes idle. If the caller wants to make a call to the destination, the call can be initiated to the destination again. Operation To make CCBS (Call Back): 1. Dial the station of another system that is currently busy. 2. Press the [CALLBK] button while a busy tone is provided. The call is cleared after a confirmation tone. When the busy station goes to Idle, the originator receives a call-back ring. When the originator answers the call-back ring, a new call is activated to the calling station. Conditions» Stand-alone IP Phone that supports H.450 can activate Call Completion.» A station can leave or have only one call back message. A new request will cancel the previous one.» A voice message cannot be left even though the VSF Gateway is installed in a local system.» When the originator does not answer the call back ring within the Net Timer setting, the call will be cleared.» There are two modes - connection mode and connectionless mode. The mode is selectable in PGM 320, Btn 8.

194 2-168 Networking Features Call Offer Description A busy user on one node is given notification that another call is waiting from another node. It is similar to a Camp On function. Operation To activate Call Offer: 1. Dial a busy station number of another system. The caller hears a busy tone. 2. Press the [CAMP ON] button or [ ] while hearing a busy tone. The busy station receives an off-hook muted ring. The calling station hears a ring-back tone instead of a busy tone. To answer the Call Offer: Press the flashing CO line button while receiving a muted ring. -or- Go on-hook. The muted ring changes to a normal CO ring. Then you can answer the offered call. Conditions» Call Offer is only applied to a station that is in talk status.» During a conference or paging, call offer is not activated.» System does not support the path reservation mode of standard QSIG specification. Net Conference Description A call to a station on one node is able to conference in a party on another node. A Net Conference can include up to three stations of the network. Operation To establish a Net Conference: 1. Press the [CONF] button during an established network call. The existing call is placed on hold and an ICM dial tone is provided. 2. Make a Net Call to a station in another node. 3. Press the [CONF] button after the second party answers. 4. The second call is placed on hold and an ICM dial tone is provided. 5. Press the [CONF] button again. All parties are connected.

195 Networking Features To clear a Net Conference: Any station in the net conference hangs up during the conference. The net conference is cancelled and the network path is cleared. Conditions» Multi-line conference time is not applied on a three-party networking conference.» A standard IP phone can not be a master station for the Net Conference. Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Description MWI represents CLI (Calling Line Indication) message wait service. As in a normal ISDN call, a station can leave a message wait for a station of another node that is not answering, if CLI message wait is enabled. MWI is indicated by CLI message on station LCD panel. Also, it can be supported by supplementary service (without CLI) when press [MSG/CALLBK] button during hearing ring back tone at Net call. Operation To retrieve MWI message: 1. Press the flashing [MSG/CALLBK] button. MWI contents (CLI number, date and time, and the calling count from the same CLI) will be shown on LCD mm/dd hh/mm CNT:01 2. Press the volume up/down button. The previous or the next MWI is displayed. To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one: Press the [ ] button. Current MWI message clears. A confirmation tone sounds and the next MWI message displays. To make a call back: 1. Retrieve the MWI by pressing the flashing [MSG/CALLBK] button and the volume up/down button. 2. Press [SAVE] button. The system makes a net call according to MWI data.

196 2-170 Networking Features Conditions» MWI is applied to LCD panel installed station only.» When system makes a call back according to MWI data, the CO line is selected within the network CO group. Net Call Forward Description It is possible for a user to remotely forward to another station over the network. Operation To activate Net Call Forward: 1. Press the [SPEAKER] button and the [FWD] button. 2. Dial the desired Net Call Forward code, and then dial the station number of a station in another system. The [FWD] button will flash and a confirmation tone will sound. Net Call Forward Codes: 1 = Unconditional (All Calls) 3 = No Answer 2 = Busy 4 = Busy / No Answer To deactivate Net Call Forward: Press the flashing [FWD] button. The [FWD] button LED will extinguish. Conditions» If both the served and diverted-to stations are located in the same system, the networking path will be cleared. That is, the forwarded call will be setup as intercom call.» The system does not check the status of a diverted-to station that is in DND, is call forwarded, or is Empty. CO Transit-In Description An incoming DID call can be rerouted to the net call destination that is in another system. Conditions» No timer is assigned to the transit CO line.» Outside line caller hears a busy tone when a networking path is not available during transit.

197 Networking Features CO Transit-Out Description A sub-system that isn t directly connected to a public network can connect to the PSTN through either the main-system or another subsystem that has a connection to the PSTN. This feature enables a user to use the network to reduce call costs by routing outgoing calls to the nearest appropriate point on the network. The system should provide sufficient digit translation or string analysis options to enable the switch to route the call correctly. Operation 1. Seize a CO line from a station in a sub-system without direct PSTN access. A dummy CO dial tone (in case of PRI, real dial tone from PX) is provided from the main system or the sub-system that has PSTN access. According to the CO dial-sending mode of enblock or overlap, the CO dial-tone-providing system is decided. 2. Dial the telephone number of the public network user. The dialed telephone on the public network receives a call alert ring and the station of sub-system hears the ring-back tone. The call connection between the public network telephone and the station of sub-system is established when the call is answered. Conditions» To use CO Transit-Out service, the sub-system user must seize the CO line explicitly.» The original station s COS is applied for toll restriction.» Outside caller hears busy tone when a networking path is not available during Transit-Out.» In the main system, the attendant must have the CO access authority about the public connection of figure.» For CO Transit-Out, any code is available using Net routing table (PGM 324); but, if there is a conflict between the Net routing table and system numbering plan, the system numbering plan has the higher priority.» To use a code for CO Transit-Out, then its type should be PSTN (PGM 324, Btn 1).» To select whether your code is repeated or not, use PGM 324, Btn7.» To select whether a CO line is connected to PSTN or Network interval, use PGM 322, Btn 4.

198 2-172 Networking Features Do-Not-Disturb (DND) Description A call to a station in DND mode can be denied though it is originates from a station in another system within the network. The calling party will receive a busy tone. Operation 1. Go into DND mode at a station. 2. From a station in another system within the network, dial the station number of the station that is in DND mode. The caller hears a busy tone with LCD display through the network. The DND station does not receive any ring signal. Conditions» When a station is in DND mode, the [NET DSS] of the DND station flashes. (CAS) Attendant Call Description An Attendant call from any node can be routed to the centralized attendant. This call will be queued when all centralized attendants are busy. Operation 1. Assign Net DSS to the attendant (except system attendant). 2. System attendant press ATD DND button. 3. Dial attendant code at any station in the system, then the call will be routed to the Net attendant. The system provides ring-back tone to the calling station, and the [Net DSS] button lights. Conditions» ICM Call is routed to a Net attendant if the system attendant presses the ATD DND button and the next attendant is a Net attendant.» A CO Call can be routed to the Net attendant only if the DID/DISA destination is an ATD and the ring is not assigned to any station.

199 Off-Hook Signaling Off-Hook Signaling Description When a CO/IP call rings into an off-hook station (connected to a CO/IP or intercom call), the station receives the assigned Off-hook ring signal. The off-hook ring signal may be either a muted normal ring signal or a single tone burst based on admin programming. This signal is delivered to the IP Keyset speaker. Operation The operation of off-hook ring signals is automatically controlled. Conditions» The volume level of off-hook ring signals is not adjustable by the user.» While using the speakerphone, a Camp On tone is provided over the speaker in place of the assigned Off-hook ring Signal.» Activating the DND feature places the station in DND and terminates any off-hook signaling.» Off-hook ring signals terminate when the call is answered, forwarded, or abandoned.» A station, which is receiving off-hook ring signals, receives normal ring upon return to an idle status. Related Features Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 CO/IP Line Ring Assignment - page Do Not Disturb - page DND - One Time DND - page Hardware IP Keyset

200 2-174 Off-Hook Voice Over Off-Hook Voice Over Description This feature allows users who are off-hook on a call (CO, IP, or Intercom), to receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver from another station. The Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) is muted so as not to interfere with the existing conversation. The called IP keyset station user may then respond to the calling party using Camp On response, Silent Text Messaging, or One-Time DND to respond. SLT users may respond using the Camp On response procedure. Operation To Place an Off-Hook Voice Over, while receiving busy: 1. Dial [#] or press a preprogrammed {OHVO} flexible button. 2. After splash tone, begin announcement. To respond to a an Off-Hook Voice Over: Use either Camp On response procedure, Silent Text Messaging, or One-Time DND. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To Place an Off-Hook Voice Over, while receiving busy: 1. Dial [#]. 2. After splash tone, begin announcement. To respond to a an Off-Hook Voice Over: Use Camp On response procedure.

201 Off-Hook Voice Over Conditions» When the called station responds via Camp On, all conditions and options available to Camp On apply (refer to the feature description for Camp On).» OHVO may be used to notify the called party of a transferred call (CO/IP Line or Intercom) by announcing the call, then releasing to complete the transfer.» When a call is transferred via OHVO, the receiving station will receive muted ringing after the transfer is complete.» The Pre-select or Custom Message feature may be used in response to a Voice Over announcement and the conditions associated with these features apply.» Both the originating and receiving station must be programmed to allow OHVO calls.» When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call, the existing call will not be disconnected.» If the receiving station is using the Speakerphone or Group Listen, Voice Over is not available. Camp On will be activated and a Camp On tone is sent to the receiving station.» If the calling station is not a Display keyset, the called station attempting to respond via text messaging will receive a short tone burst (to indicate error tone) and the following display will be shown for 5 seconds if called station has an LCD: *NO DISPLAY AVAILABLE* PRESS CAMP-ON TO RESPOND» A receiving station may chain messages (use multiple messages). Even after sending a message, a called station may press {MUTE} to talk to the calling station. Each time a message is sent, both stations receive a splash tone and both displays update. Related Features Call Waiting / Camp On - page 2-98 Custom Messages - page Group Listening - page Pre-selected Messages - page Silent Text Messaging - page 2-115

202 2-176 On-Hook Dialing On-Hook Dialing Description If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled in admin programming, an IP Keyset user can place calls without first having to either lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. If Automatic Speaker Select is disabled, the user must lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] prior to using the telephone. Operation To activate On-Hook Dialing: Press an assigned {FLEX} button. -or- Press [REDIAL], or [SPEED] followed by a speed bin number. -or- Dial a desired station number. -or- Dial a CO Line access number followed by a desired external telephone number. -or- Press a {CO/IP} flexible button and then dial the desired number. Conditions» To terminate an unanswered call, press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button. The call is terminated and the [SPEAKER] LED is extinguished.» When using a keyset with a speakerphone, the microphone is active unless [MUTE] is pressed. Related Features Automatic Speaker Select - page 2-78 Group Listening - page Headset Compatibility - page Mute - page Speakerphone - page Hardware IP Keyset

203 One-Touch Record One-Touch Record Refer to "Two-Way Record" on page Paging Internal/External & All Call Page Description A station, which is permitted to access paging features, can connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all of the system s Internal/External Page zones. Stations are grouped into "zones" to which pages can be issued. Stations not assigned to a zone will not receive any pages, including All Call pages. A Page Warning Tone, if assigned, will be provided to the Page Zone(s) prior to the audio connection. The user is allowed to continue the page for the period of time specified in Page Timeout Timer programming, after which the user is disconnected. The Page Zone Access Codes are: Internal Page Zones (MFIM) (MFIME) Internal All Call Page 543 External Page Zones External All Call Page 548 All Call Page 549 Meet Me Page Answer 544 IP Keyset users may assign a {ZONE} flexible button. Operation To assign a {ZONE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + Page Zone Access Code + [SAVE] To make a page: 1. Lift the handset to receive Intercom dial tone. 2. Dial the desired Page Zone Access Code.

204 2-178 Paging -or- Press the {ZONE} flexible button. (A Page Warning Tone sounds, if assigned.) 3. Make the announcement. 4. Replace the handset. To queue for a page when busy is received: 1. Press [CALLBK]. 2. Replace the handset. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To make a page: 1. Lift the handset to receive Intercom dial tone. 2. Dial the desired Page Zone Access Code. A Page Warning Tone sounds, if assigned 3. Make the announcement. 4. Replace the handset. To queue for a page when busy is received: 1. Dial Call Back feature code [556]. 2. Replace the handset. To answer a Meet Me Page: 1. Lift the handset to receive Intercom dial tone. 2. Dial the Meet Me Page code [544]. Conditions» If a station is denied access to paging, an error tone will sound when that station user dials any Page Zone Access Code.» Stations dialing a Page Zone Access Code will be queued when any of the other Internal or External Page zones are busy.» DTMF signals from stations are transmitted through the system s External Page port after access.» If an IP Keyset user attempts to page using the speakerphone, the LCD will show "LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE".» Stations receiving a page are considered idle for other incoming calls and ring will override Page announcements over an IP Keyset Speaker.» Stations in DND or busy will not receive Page announcements.» A station using the Paging feature is considered busy.

205 Paging 2-179» Stations that are not included in any Internal Page Zone, will not receive any page, including an All Call Page.» For external paging, an external amplifier and speaker(s) are needed.» The Page Warning Tone can be turned on/off on a system-wide basis via Admin programming.» All page types can be answered with a "Meet Me Page Answer" by dialing feature code [544].» When the Page Timeout Timer expires, the system releases the paging connection and sends an intercom busy tone to the paging station.» While a station is using the paging feature, other stations cannot simultaneously use paging.» A station can have only one Page Zone queuing request at a time. If another Page Zone queuing request is attempted, only the later queued request is honored.» When a busy Page Zone becomes available, it selects the oldest station in page queue and signals it with a distinctive ring to indicate queue callback (regardless of station signal mode).» The queue callback ring signals the station for a maximum of 15 seconds. If the signal is not acted upon within this time period, the queue is canceled and the next station in the queue is signaled.» If a station is busy when the queue callback ring occurs, the station is skipped and the next station in queue receives the queue callback ring. The busy station is left at the bottom of the queue, unless there are no other stations in queue. If there are no other stations in queue, the page queue request is canceled.» When a waiting station goes to idle status, and both a "Queued Page Zone Callback Ring" and a "Queued CO Callback" exist, Paging Zone access has priority. Related Features Meet Me Page Answer Hardware External Amplifier & Speakers

206 2-180 Paging Meet Me Page Answer Description Any station may respond to a "Meet Me" Page request over an Internal or External Page Zone. The user answers the page from any station and is connected to the paging party via an intercom circuit. An IP Keyset user may assign a {MEET ME} flexible button. Operation To assign a {MEET ME} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [544] + [SAVE] To answer a page with Meet Me Page Answer: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] to receive intercom dial tone. 2. Dial Meet Me Page Answer feature code [544] or press {MEET ME} flexible button. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To answer a page with Meet Me Page Answer: 1. Lift the handset to receive intercom dial tone. 2. Dial Meet Me Page Answer feature code [544]. Conditions» A Meet Me Page must be answered prior to Page Timeout Timer expiration.» A station may answer a Meet Me Page from any station, regardless of pickup/paging groups assignment and page access permission.» The paging party must remain off-hook until the paged party answers the Meet-Me request. The initiator may press [MUTE] to eliminate transmitting over the page circuit while waiting for the party to answer. Related Features Internal/External & All Call Page - page 2-177

207 Paging Push-To-Talk Paging Description Each IP Keyset can be assigned as a member of one or more of the system's nine Push-To-Talk page groups. The IP Keyset user may log-in or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which it is assigned. Once logged in, the user may place or receive one-way page announcements to/from other users who are logged in to the same PTT group. To place a PTT page announcement, the user must press and hold the {PTT} Flex button. Operation IP KEYSET To assign a {PTT} Flex button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] [SAVE] To log-in to a PTT group: 1. Dial [#0], the PTT Log-in/out code. 2. Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 and 0 for all groups). To log-out of the PTT group(s): 1. Dial [#0], the PTT Log-in/out code. 2. Dial [*]. To place a page to the active PTT group: 1. Press and hold the {PTT} Flex button. 2. After confirmation tone make page announcement. Conditions» Conditions associated with Internal/External & All Call Page apply to Push to Talk paging.» To access PTT paging, the station must be permitted access to system paging, PGM 111, Btn 7.» If allowed access to all PTT groups, a station may log-into all groups (PTT group 0) to place announcements to all groups simultaneously. A station logged into PTT group 0 does not receive pages.» A station can only log-in to PTT groups to which it is assigned as a member.» The station must have a {PTT} button to place or receive PTT announcements. The Nomad IP has a fixed PTT button.» The station may be assigned and logged in to the default active PTT group in the system database.

208 2-182 Pre-selected Messages Related Features Paging Hardware IP Keyset Pre-selected Messages Description A user can select a message to be displayed by the LCD of a calling station. Ten of the messages are fixed (01-10), with several permitting the user to input auxiliary information such as time, date, number. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} button. A flexible button can also be programmed as a {ONE-TOUCH PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} button. Operation To assign a {PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [51] + [SAVE] To assign a {ONE-TOUCH PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [51] + Message Code + [SAVE] To activate Pre-selected Message: 1. Press [PGM], then dial feature dial code [51]. Confirmation tone sounds. -or- Press the {PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} flexible button. 2. Dial two-digit message code (01-10). MSG 01: LUNCH, RETURN AT hh:mm MSG 02: ON VACATION / RETURN AT DATE mm:dd MSG 03: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN AT TIME hh:mm MSG 04: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN AT DATE mm:dd MSG 05: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN UNKNOWN MSG 06: CALL: (Telephone No: Up to 17 digits) MSG 07: IN OFFICE: STA xxxx MSG 08: IN A MEETING / RETURN AT TIME hh:mm MSG 09: AT HOME MSG 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE

209 Pre-selected Messages Dial auxiliary data as desired. 4. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds, [FWD] LED flashes, and the station returns to idle. -or- 1. Press the {ONE-TOUCH PRE-SELECTED MESSAGE} flexible button. 2. Dial auxiliary data as desired, if appropriate. 3. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds, [FWD] LED flashes, and the station returns to idle. To cancel active Pre-selected Message: Press the flashing [FWD] button. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To activate Pre-selected Message: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial SLT Programming code [561]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial feature code [51]. 4. Enter the two-digit Message code (01-10). Msg 01: LUNCH, RETURN AT hh:mm Msg 02: ON VACATION / RETURN AT DATE mm:dd Msg 03: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN AT TIME hh:mm Msg 04: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN AT DATE mm:dd Msg 05: OUT OF OFFICE / RETURN UNKNOWN Msg 06: CALL: (Telephone No: Up to 17 digits) Msg 07: IN OFFICE: STA xxxx Msg 08: IN A MEETING / RETURN AT TIME hh:mm Msg 09: AT HOME / RETURN AT TIME hh:mm Msg 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE 5. Dial auxiliary data as desired. 6. Briefly press the hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds. To cancel active Pre-selected Message: Lift the handset and dial [559].

210 2-184 Pre-selected Messages Conditions» The calling station must have an LCD to receive the message.» SLTs are notified that Pre-selected Message is active with stutter dial tone when lifting the handset. The IP Keyset [FWD] LED flashes when a Pre-selected Message is active.» Activating Pre-selected Message display does not interfere with normal operation of the station.» Activating DND or Call Forward cancels Pre-selected Messages.» Pre-selected Messages Msg 01 to 04 and Msg 06 to 08 permit user input of auxiliary information. Information such as time, date or number may be entered as shown in the Message Table.» The Attendant station can activate a Pre-selected Message for other stations. However, Pre-selected Messages cannot be used by an Attendant. Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Custom Messages - page Do Not Disturb - page Hardware IP Keyset with LCD to receive messages

211 Prime Line - Immediate/Delayed Prime Line - Immediate/Delayed Description When a user goes to an off-hook state, the system normally provides Intercom dial tone. If desired, a station can be assigned to automatically access a pre-assigned system resource (Prime Line). The Prime Line can be configured to perform any of the Idle Line Selection settings: Activate a feature assigned to a flexible button as if pressed Seize a particular CO/IP Line Seize a line within a specified CO Line Group Call another station Prime Line access can be defined as immediate or delayed. Immediate - upon going off-hook, the system accesses the Prime Line. Delayed - upon going off-hook, normal Intercom dial tone is received. After expiration of the Prime Line Delay Timer, the Idle Line Selection is accessed. During the period of Intercom dial tone, a user can dial or press a button to activate a feature which will override the Prime Line assignment. Operation To access the station s Prime Line: Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] and take no action. The assigned Idle Line Selection function of the Prime Line will be accessed. Conditions» SLT uses the flexible button feature of Idle Line Selection with Speed Bin Number.» If the Prime Line Delay Timer setting is greater than the Dial Tone Timer setting, the Delayed Prime Line will not activate. In this case, it is necessary to either reduce the setting of the Prime Line Delay Timer or extend the setting of the Dial Tone Timer. Related Features Intercom Call (ICM Call) - page Speakerphone - page Station Flexible Buttons - page Hardware IP Keyset

212 2-186 Private Line Private Line Description One or more IP Keyset users can be assigned exclusive use of a CO line or lines. This feature requires an appearance {CO} flexible button at the user s IP Keyset. Operation To place an outgoing Private line call: 1. Press the {CO} flexible button assigned as the Private line. Dial tone is received from the CO line. 2. Dial the desired number. To answer an incoming Private line call: Press the flashing {CO} flexible button. Conditions» Private lines do not recall to the Attendant station.» Private lines are not subject to Call Pick Up, except by an assigned Secretary who has an appearance of the Private line.» When put on hold, a Private line recalls the user after expiration of the appropriate Hold timer. The user receives recall for the Hold Recall time and then, if still unanswered, the user continues to receive recall for the Attendant Recall time. At the expiration of the Attendant Recall time the call disconnects and the Private line returns to idle.» A Private line will Call Forward only if the receiving station has an appearance ({CO} flexible button) for the Private line. However, calls on a Private line can be Call Forwarded to a VSF/VM mailbox. Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Call Forward, Preset - page 2-88 Executive/Secretary Pairs - page Hold - page Hardware IP Keyset

213 Ringing Line Preference (RLP) Ringing Line Preference (RLP) Description A station can be configured in admin programming so that incoming calls are automatically answered and connected to the station by lifting the handset or pressing [SPEAKER]. Operation To answer a call while the station is ringing: Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. Conditions» When multiple calls are ringing at the station, a priority can be defined to answer the calls. By default the priority is: Transferred CO/IP call -> CO/IP recall -> incoming CO/IP call -> queued CO/IP call -> intercom call» Ringing Line Preference overrides Prime/Delayed Prime Line.» SLTs will only operate in the RLP mode. When ringing, lifting the handset connects to the incoming call. Related Features Prime Line - Immediate/Delayed - page 2-185

214 2-188 Save Number Redial (SNR) Save Number Redial (SNR) Description The number dialed for a CO/IP call may be stored in a buffer for future redial. The number can only be saved after you dial the number while on a seized CO/ IP line. The number can be saved prior to being connected with the called party or saved during an ongoing conversation. This number is saved in memory until you save another number for future redial. Operation To save a dialed number, while on a CO/IP call: Press [SAVE]. To dial a saved number: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [SAVE]. -or- Press [SAVE] only. Conditions» The saved number can be a maximum of 48 digits.» Dialing the saved number will automatically seize the CO/IP line that was used for the original call. If the CO/IP line is busy, a CO/IP line from the same group is selected and the saved number is dialed. If all CO/IP lines from the group are busy, the user receives a busy tone.» If there is no {CO/IP} flexible button, the call will be presented on a {POOL} button, or a {LOOP} button.» Save Number Redial is protected from power failure.» Manually dialing a Flash during a CO/IP call will cause only those digits after the Flash to be stored and re-dialed as the Save Number Redial. Related Features CO Line Flash - page Last Number Redial - page Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Dial - page Hardware IP Keyset

215 Short Message Service (SMS) Short Message Service (SMS) Description The internal Short Message Service (SMS) provides the ability to send and receive text messages to and from IP Keysets equipped with a display. The text can comprise words or numbers or an alphanumeric combination. Each short message can be up to 100 characters in length when Latin alphabets are used. Operation To assign a Flex button as a {SMS SEND} button; [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] [SAVE] To resend an existing SMS message: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial [36], the SMS send code. SMS SENDING MODE RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2) 3. Dial 1 to resend a message. DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX) SKIP-(*) 4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message or [*] to use the displayed station range. STA SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL-(#) 5. Press the [SAVE] button to send the message or [#] to cancel.

216 2-190 Short Message Service (SMS) To send a new message: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial [36], the SMS send code. SMS SENDING MODE RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2) 3. Dial 2 to send a new message. DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX) 4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message. STA SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL-(#) 5. Dial the message using digits for each character as shown in the following figures; use the [REDIAL] or [SPEED] button to delete a character. Other Codes 1 = 10 6 = 60 Space = 1 2 = 20 7 = 70, = 3 3 = 30 8 = 80 : = 2 4 = 40 9 = 90. = 13 5 = 50 0 = 00 = 0 Figure 2-12: Keypad Codes (IP-24DH, IP7008D, IP7024D, & IP7024LD Phones) 6. Press the [SAVE] button to send and store the message or [#] to cancel.

217 Short Message Service (SMS) To retrieve SMS Messages: 1. Press [MSG/CALLBK] button. The message contents summary will be shown as below. ST CL VS VM FS MS Dial [6] to select MS, Short Message Service messages. [1] = ST: Station Message Wait [2] = CL: CLI Message Wait [3] = VS: VSF Message Wait [4] = VM: Commercial Voice Mail Message Wait [5] = FS: PathFinder IP Message Wait [6] = MS: SMS Message Wait 3. The display shows the first line of messages. MSG: [0] EMERGENCY CONF [1] LETS GO TO LUNCH AT M 4. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to scroll through messages. MSG: [2] WE HAVE A MTG AT [3] CONFERENCE AT 9 AM 5. Dial the message number to view the entire message. Use [VOL UP]/ [VOL DOWN] to view each line of the message. MSG:> WE HAVE A MTG AT >7PM IF YOU CANNOT MAKE 6. Press [#] to exit message scroll. DELETE MESSAGE YES : 1 NO : 2 ALL : 3 7. Dial [1] to delete the message, [2] to view the first line of messages, or [3] to delete all received SMS messages. Conditions» The system can store up to 10 received SMS Messages and 1 sent SMS

218 2-192 Short Message Service (SMS) message per station.» If 10 received SMS messages are already stored, additional incoming SMS messages are ignored. Hardware IP Keyset w/display

219 SLT Name Entry SLT Name Entry Description A SLT user has the capability to program a name so that a caller that has a station with an LCD will see the SLT user s name instead of their station number. Operation SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To register the name at the SLT: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the SLT Programming code [561]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial the SLT Station User Program Code [74]. 4. Enter name, refer to Figure 2-13 on page Briefly depress the hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds. To delete the name at the SLT: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the SLT Programming code [561]. Confirmation tone sounds. 3. Dial the SLT Station User Program Code [74]. 4. Briefly depress the hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds. Related Features Directory Dial Station Speed Dial - page 2-206

220 2-194 SMDR SMDR Call Cost Display Description SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) call records include the call duration and may include a call cost. In addition, while on an external call (incoming or outgoing) the call duration is shown by the IP Keyset LCD. For outgoing calls, the system can provide a call cost in place of the call duration for display. The cost is determined by: Fixed charge per Call Meter Pulse, Advice of Charge, or Estimated call cost updated based on the Elapsed Call Time. The technique selected is based on the type of facility (analog, digital, IP) services provided by the carrier, and the system database. Analog CO Lines Where "Call Metering Pulses" are provided, the system can apply the defined "SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse" and "SMDR Decimal" with received Call Metering Pulses to estimate a call cost. When no "Metering Type" is assigned in the system s database, the call duration is used with the "SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse" and "SMDR Decimal" to estimate the call cost. The cost is updated each time the Elapsed Call Timer expires. ISDN Lines For ISDN Lines, the "Advice of Charge" information in the ISDN Facility Message is employed to determine the cost. VoIP For IP related calls, the call duration with the SMDR cost and decimal are used with cost updated each time the Elapsed Call Timer expires. Operation Call Cost is determined automatically and output to the IP Keyset display and the SMDR RS-232 port.

221 SMDR Conditions» The call cost display is started after the "SMDR Start Timer" if enabled or the first "Call Metering Pulse" as appropriate.» When a station returns to a call on hold, the call display will include the time the call was connected to the station, as well as on hold.» If the cost per call metering pulse is set to 0.00, the display and SMDR output will show the duration of the call. Hardware IP Keyset SMDR Call Records Description Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls. An assignable database options allow the recording of all calls (incoming and outgoing local and long distance) or only outgoing calls that meet the toll call status requirements below (long distance) and calls that exceed a minimum duration. Call records can be output either upon completion (real-time) or on demand by the System Attendant or Administrator. Operation For real-time SMDR, records are output after completion of the call. STA CO TIME START DIALED COST ACCOUNT CODE AAAA BB DD:DD:DD FF/FF/FF EE:EE HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SSSSSSSSSS VVVVVVVVVVVV AAAA BB DD:DD:DD FF/FF/FF EE:EE H CCC...CC SSSSSSSSSS VVVVVVVVVVVV 4-digit station call originator field (station number) 2-digit CO line /IP channel port field 8-digit call duration field (HH:MM:SS) 8-digit year, month, and day of call origination (YY/MM/DD) 5-digit call origination time (HH:MM) 1-character call type identifier: I = incoming O = outgoing T = transfer Outgoing: 20-digit collected dial digit field or an IP number Incoming: CLI 10-digit call cost field 12-digit account code field

222 2-196 SMDR ATTENDANT To print SMDR on demand: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0111]. 3. Enter the Station range. 4. Press [SAVE]. To delete SMDR on demand: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0112]. 3. Enter the Station range. 4. Press [SAVE]. To abort SMDR printing on demand: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0114]. Conditions» A Long Distance (LD) call is determined based on the first dialed digits and/or the maximum local call digit count. If the first dialed digit(s) match a programmed long distance digit or the count of digits dialed exceeds the defined LD Digit count, the call is considered a LD call. Note for behind PBX applications, the LD determination is made only after a PBX Trunk Access code is dialed as the first digit(s).» With the exception of DISA calls, incoming call information incorporates the duration of ring prior to answer. The ring duration, in seconds, is provided in the Dialed number field of the call record.» A header, including the "Customer Site ID" will be proceeded by two blank lines and is printed every 66th line.» The SMDR output is an ASCII stream of 80 characters with the header and the information elements for each call as described below.» If SMDR is enabled, information acquisition begins after "SMDR Start Timer" and ends at call completion. Related Features Lost Call Recording - page Traffic Analysis - Overview - page 2-41 Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data

223 SMDR Lost Call Recording Description Incoming calls where the caller hangs up before answer are considered Lost (abandoned) Calls and special SMDR records can be provided. In addition transferred calls and calls on hold which disconnect before completion or reconnection are considered Lost. Lost call records are output in real-time as they occur. A Lost Call Count report is available on-demand. Operation For real-time SMDR, records are output after completion of the call. NO STA CO TIME START DIALED Remarks 0001 Ext 31 00:00 08/05/02 15:00 R RING 00: :00 08/05/02 15:25 R RING 00: :00 08/05/02 15:58 R100 RING 00: :00 08/05/02 16:00 R103 RING 00: :00 08/05/02 16:01 G620 RING 00: :00 08/05/02 16:02 G621 RING 00: :04 08/05/02 16:04 H100 RING 00: :07 08/05/02 17:04 H100 RING 00:01 Incoming call, CO 31 rang assigned stations 5 sec before disconnect. Call sent to Attendant, as no station available to ring, rang for 9 sec before disconnect. Call directed to station 100, rang for 4 sec prior to disconnect. Call Unconditionally Forwarded from station 102 to 103, rang for 4 sec before disconnect. Call to Station 104, a member of Group 620, rang for 6 sec prior to disconnect. Call to Ring Group 621, rang for 11 sec prior to disconnect. Call at station 100, disconnected after 2 sec on Hold by station 100. Call transferred from station 100 to 102 and disconnected after 1 sec of ring.

224 2-198 SMDR Call Type Code and Description: G: Incoming call to hunt group. H: 1. Incoming call transferred to another sta, but the caller disconnects before answer. 2. Incoming call placed on hold and caller disconnects before pickup. R: 1. Direct call (DID, Private Line, DISA) to a sta is terminated by caller prior to answer. 2. Direct call to a station is forwarded to another station that does not answer before the caller disconnects. ATTENDANT To Print the Lost Call Count Report: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code [0115]. Example: Lost call count start time: 30/08/02 09:00 Current time: 30/06/04 18:00 Total lost call count until now: 12 To delete (reset) the Lost Call Count: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program code [0116]. The Lost Call Count is reset to zero and start time is set to current time. Message displays: The lost call count is cleared. Conditions» Individual Lost Call records are not stored. They are only available through the real-time output.» Print Lost Calls must be enabled to output the Lost Call records or the Lost Call Count report.» The format for Lost Call records is shown above. The dialed number field of the normal SMDR record indicates the type of call, station or group number, and ring duration. Related Features SMDR - page Traffic Analysis - Overview - page 2-41 Hardware An RS-232 compatible device to collect ASCII data.

225 Speakerphone Speakerphone Description Each IP Keyset is equipped with circuitry enabling the telephone to be used hands-free in two-way conversations. Operation To activate the speakerphone: Press [SPEAKER]. [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. To switch from Handset to Speakerphone: 1. Press [SPEAKER]. [SPEAKER] LED lights steady. 2. Replace Handset. Speakerphone is activated. To terminate a speakerphone call: Press [SPEAKER]. [SPEAKER] LED extinguishes. Conditions» If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled for the station, pressing a DSS, CO/LOOP/POOL flexible button, or Speed Dial button automatically activates the speakerphone.» The [MUTE] LED indicates the status of the Microphone. When lit, the Microphone is disabled.» When Group Listen is enabled, pressing [SPEAKER] while using the handset will send audio to both the handset and speaker. However, only the handset microphone is active. In order to activate the speakerphone microphone, the handset must be placed on-hook.» When headset operation is assigned for the station, the speakerphone is disabled and [SPEAKER] activates the headset instead of the speaker. Related Features Automatic Speaker Select - page 2-78 Group Listening - page Headset Compatibility - page Mute - page Hardware IP Keyset required

226 2-200 Station Call Coverage Station Call Coverage Description Flexible buttons can be assigned to provide incoming call coverage for all calls that ring to another station. The coverage can be on an immediate or a delayed basis, to allow the "covered" station time to answer before ringing the "covering" station. Both the covered station and the covering station must use station programming to enable the Call Coverage feature. Operation To assign a {CALL COVERAGE} flexible button at the covering station: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [67] + covered station number + [SAVE] To enable/disable Call Coverage mode, the covered station must: [PGM] + [14] + [1] + either [1] or [0] to set mode to ON or OFF To set delayed ringing, the covered station must: [PGM] + [14] + [2] + rings to delay (0-9) + [SAVE] To answer a call for a covered station: Press the flashing {Call Coverage} flexible button, -or- Press [SPEAKER], -or- Lift the handset, if RLP is enabled. Conditions» Multiple stations can have Call Coverage flexible buttons for the same station(s).» Once a "covering" station answers a call for the covered station, other stations attempting to answer the call will receive an error tone.» A flexible button must be assigned to provide Call Coverage ability.» An IP Keyset user can cover for an SLT extension, however an SLT cannot perform the Call Coverage function.» The covering station will receive ringing (if idle) or muted ringing (if off-hook). The ring tone will be the appropriate tone and cadence for the call type.

227 Station Flexible Buttons 2-201» Direct CO/IP calls (except H.323 standard IP calls) have priority over Call Coverage calls.» If the "covering" station is in DND, no audible will be heard. Only visual LCD and LED information will be presented.» Only one Call Coverage button may be assigned per covered station at the "covering" station. Related Features Station Flexible Buttons - page Hardware IP Keyset Station Flexible Buttons Description The IP Keyset incorporates a field of 24 flexible buttons. The system administrator can assign functions to flexible buttons of a particular Keyset or range of Keysets via Admin programming. With the exception of CO Line buttons, flexible buttons can be assigned or reassigned at the station by the end-user. If allowed in Admin programming, the user can also assign or reassign CO Line buttons. Specifically, users can assign flexible button functions by using feature codes in either: Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Keyset User Programming Codes of Fixed Feature Code Numbering Plan Operation To assign a Flexible button at the station: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press the desired flexible button. 3. Dial the desired digits from the "Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan" on page 2-231, -or- Press [PGM] again and then dial the desired digits from the "Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan" on page Press [SAVE].

228 2-202 Station Flexible Buttons Conditions» {LOOP} and {POOL} flexible buttons provide a status indication for the call as long as the station has supervisory control.» If there is no available button for a call, the station will not ring for an incoming CO/IP call. Transfers to the station immediately recall the initiator and recalls are routed directly to the Attendant.» A station may have multiple {LOOP} and {POOL} flexible buttons.» When all CO Lines in a group are busy, any {POOL} flexible buttons associated with the group will show busy. Otherwise, {POOL} flexible buttons will only display the status of an active call.» {POOL} flexible buttons will access a CO Line from the designated group using either the Round Robin or Last Used method, based on Admin programming.» The first priority for the appearance of a CO call transfer is a direct CO Line appearance. If not available, a {LOOP} flexible button appearance is employed. If not available, a {POOL} flexible button appearance is used. If no appearance is available, the transferring station recalls immediately. Related Features Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan - page Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan - page Flexible Numbering Plan - page Hardware IP Keyset

229 Station Groups Station Groups Description Stations can be grouped for incoming call routing and Pickup features. Up to 40 Station Groups can be defined with up to 70 stations in a group. Seven types of group can be defined: Circular Terminal UCD/ACD Ring Pickup External Voice Mail VSF-Voice Mail Circular Station Group In Circular Hunt, calls to a station in the group will go to the station, if unavailable or unanswered in the hunt no answer time, the call will be directed to the next station in the group. The call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried. The call will remain at the last station tried or will be passed to the assigned overflow station/group. A circular station group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group Number) so that only calls to the pilot number will hunt. In this case, the call will be directed to the first listed station in the group and, if needed, hunt through each station in the group until reaching the last station where the call will remain or will be passed to the overflow destination. Terminal Station Group Calls are sent to the called station, if unanswered or unavailable, the call proceeds to the next listed station in the group. The call will continue to hunt until reaching the last station in the group where the call will remain or can be sent to an overflow station/group. A Terminal Station Group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group Number) so that only calls to the pilot number will hunt. In this case, the call will be routed as in the Circular Pilot Number Hunt group described above.

230 2-204 Station Groups UCD/ACD Station Group Calls are sent to the group by dialing the pilot number (Station Group Number) or assigning CO/IP lines to directly terminate (ring) to the group. Calls are directed to the station in the group that has been idle for the longest continuous time. If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received for the group, the call may be routed to an alternate location, or may continue to wait (queue) for an available station in the group. After queuing to the group, the caller may be routed to an overflow station/ group. An ACD Supervisor can be assigned to monitor the real-time status of the group and act to oversee and assist agents in the group. The ACD Supervisor can print group statistics and activate alternate routing for the group. Station Ring Group A call to any station in the Group will cause all stations in the Group to receive ring and any station in the group may answer the call. If the call remains unanswered beyond the Overflow timer, it will be sent to the defined overflow station/group. Multiple calls can be received by a ring group and serviced in any order. External Voice Mail Station Group This group is assigned for external Voice Mail systems employing an SLT port interface to the system. An External VM group is assigned as either Circular or Terminal hunt group. The External Voice Mail may employ in-band signaling over the audio connection or, using the SMDI protocol, interface over the defined RS-232 port of the MFIM. Pick Up Group A station is assigned to a Call Pick Up group and may then pickup (answer) calls to other stations assigned to the same group using the system s Group Call Pick Up feature. VSF Voice Mail (VM) Group When a call (internal/external) to a station is forwarded to VSF-VM Group, the VSF will play the station user s recorded greeting, if any, and then the caller can leave a voice message.

231 Station Groups Group Announcements Station Groups can be supported by several VSF AA announcements. Calls to a Group, which are unanswered after the 1st Announcement Timer are answered and connected to the 1st announcement. A second announcement can be provided if the call continues to wait in queue beyond the "2nd Announcement Timer". The second message can be repeated at assigned intervals until the call is answered or is disconnected. Generally, Station Group calls can be answered during an announcement, terminating the announcement and connecting the member to the call. A "Guaranteed" announcement can be defined (set the 1st Announcement Timer to 000) to playback to the caller in its entirety. Conditions» A Station Group cannot route calls to a member station that is in DND or Call Forward.» A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not initiate a transfer recall.» Calls to a Station Group receive either ring-back tone or MOH while queued to the Group.» If a call is not answered within the Overflow timer, it will be sent to an overflow station/group.» At expiration of the Overflow timer the call is sent to the defined overflow station/group. If no Overflow destination is defined, the call is dropped.» One of the twenty available VSF AA announcements may be defined as an overflow destination. The VSF AA announcement may request further routing instructions from the caller (CCR) or drop the call. Related Features Mute - page VSF AA VSF VM

232 2-206 Station Speed Dial Station Speed Dial Description System memory provides each station with unique "Speed Dial" bins (20 bins per station in MFIM systems and 100 bins per station in MFIME systems), which can be programmed with up to 48 digits each. Common dialed numbers can be stored and accessed quickly using these Station Speed Dial bins. A Station Speed Dial number may contain special characters for use on CO lines (analog and ISDN) including: [ ] as the 1 st digit: Flash as 1 st digit: [Call Back]: [ ] not 1 st digit: [MSG] as 1 st digit: Activate Display Security Activate Dial Tone detect Insert a Pause in dial command Pulse to DTMF Switchover Send as ISDN Keypad Facility IE Operation To dial a Station Speed Dial bin: 1. If desired, lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the preprogrammed {SPEED DIAL} flexible button. -or- 1. If desired, lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [SPEED]. 3. Dial the Station Speed Dial bin (00-19, MFIM; or , MFIME). To assign a {STATION SPEED DIAL} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [SPEED] + Station Speed Dial bin + [SAVE] To program Station Speed Dial Bin at Keyset: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press [SPEED]. 3. Dial the desired Station Speed Bin No (00-19, MFIM; or , MFIME). 4. Press a {CO/IP} button, {LOOP} button, or {POOL} button, or dial a CO/IP line / group access code ((88xx (MFIME 88xxx), 8xx, or 9)).

233 Station Speed Dial Dial the number to be stored. Speed Digits can be IP Address or CO Subscriber Number: IP Case: IP Address [XXX + * + XXX + * + XXX + * + XXX + #]. CO Subscriber Number: Country Code (if desired) + Area Code (if desired) + Subscriber Number. 6. Press [SAVE]. 7. Enter a Name, if desired, using the Keypad codes as shown in Figure Other Codes 1 = 10 6 = 60 Space = 1 2 = 20 7 = 70, = 3 3 = 30 8 = 80 : = 2 4 = 40 9 = 90. = 13 5 = 50 0 = 00 = 0 Figure 2-13: Keypad Codes (IP-24DH, IP7008D, IP7024D, & IP7024LD Phones) 8. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds. Upon successful entry of a speed dial number, a confirmation tone sounds. At this time, additional speed dial programming is possible. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To dial a Station Speed Dial bin: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial Station Speed Dial feature code [558]. 3. Dial the Station Speed Dial bin (00-19, MFIM; or , MFIME). To program Station Speed Dial Bin: 1. Dial the SLT speed dial programming code [555]. 2. Dial the desired speed bin number (00-19, MFIM; or , MFIME). 3. Dial CO line number or CO group number. 4. Dial the number to be stored. 5. Briefly press the hookswitch. Confirmation tone sounds.

234 2-208 Station Speed Dial Conditions» The [#] and [ ] of an IP address in Speed Bin are not interpreted into Pause, Switch Over, Dial tone Detect, or Flash.» If you dial an empty station speed bin, an error tone sounds.» A CO/IP line must be programmed for use with an individual speed number.» The system will attempt to dial out on the specified line. If it is busy, it will choose another line within the same group when CO programmed code is Group Access code (LOOP/POOL/IP/CO Group Code).» If all CO lines within a group are busy, a busy tone will sound when accessing the station speed number.» Station speed numbers are protected by battery backup memory.» The speed dial locations are used for both CO calls and IP calls.» The CO/IP line is presented as a direct appearance on the telephone. If there is no direct appearance, the line is presented on the {POOL} or {LOOP} button.» If you select a CO/IP line prior to speed dialing, the selected CO/IP line overrides a programmed CO line in speed dial.» At a keyset with LCD, "Enter Name" will be displayed on the LCD for Dial by Name after speed number 00 + [SAVE] button, and you can enter a name for Dial by Name. If you press [SAVE] without entering a name, the registered name is erased.» If a station speed dial bin contains a dial tone detect command ([FLASH] button) and the dial tone detect field is set to "Yes", the system will detect CO dial tone. Related Features CO Line Flash - page Dial By Name - page Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover - page Display Security - page Last Number Redial - page Save Number Redial (SNR) - page Station Call Coverage - page System Speed Dial - page 2-210

235 Station Speed Dial Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment Description A user may program a telephone number directly to a Flex button without the need to assign the number to a Speed Dial bin. In this case, the telephone number is allocated to the highest numbered Station Speed Dial bin available. Operation To assign a telephone number to a Flex button: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Press the desired empty Flex button. 3. Press the soft button below the "TEL NUM" display selection or, for IP Keyset 24D and 24DH phones, press the [ICM] button. 4. Press the CO/IP line button or dial the CO/IP line access code. 5. Dial the telephone number. 6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button 7. Dial the name to be associated with the number (optional). 8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. To place a call using the Flex button: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Press the assigned Flex button.

236 2-210 System Speed Dial Conditions» This feature is available to users of the IP Keyset 7024D, 7024LD, 24D and 24DH phones only.» When a Flex button is assigned with a telephone number, the system will allocate the number to the highest available Station Speed Dial bin number. If no bin is available, the user will receive error tone when attempting to assign the telephone number.» The telephone number may include any of the special Speed Dial commands ([MSG/CALLBK], [FLASH], display security, etc.). Related Features Station Speed Dial Hardware IP Keyset 7024D 7024LD, 24D or 24DH System Speed Dial Description System memory provides space for "speed dial" bins (800 bins for MFIM systems and 3000 bins for MFIME systems), which can be programmed with up to 48 digits each. Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator. System Speed Dial numbers enable fast dialing by station users. A System Speed Dial number may contain special characters for use on analog CO lines including: [ ] as the 1 st digit: Flash as 1 st digit: [Call Back]: [ ] not 1 st digit: [MSG] as 1 st digit: Activate Display Security Activate Dial Tone detect Insert a Pause in dial command Pulse to DTMF Switchover Send as ISDN Keypad Facility IE

237 System Speed Dial Operation To assign a {SYSTEM SPEED DIAL} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [SPEED] + System Speed Dial bin + [SAVE] To dial a System Speed Dial Bin at Keyset: 1. If desired, lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the preprogrammed {SPEED DIAL} flexible button. -or- 1. If desired, lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [SPEED]. 3. Dial the System Speed Dial bin ( , MFIM; or , MFIME). SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To dial a System Speed Dial bin: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial Station Speed Dial feature dial code [558]. 3. Dial the Station Speed Dial bin ( , MFIM; or , MFIME). ATTENDANT To program a System Speed Dial bin: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press [SPEED]. 3. Dial the System Speed Dial bin ( , MFIM; or , MFIME). 4. Press a {CO/IP} flexible button, {LOOP}, or {POOL} flexible button, or dial a CO/IP line/group access code ([88xx], [8xx], or [9]). 5. Dial the number to be stored. 6. Press [SAVE].

238 2-212 System Speed Dial 7. Enter a name, if desired, using the following Keypad Codes as shown in Figure Other Codes 1 = 10 6 = 60 Space = 1 2 = 20 7 = 70, = 3 3 = 30 8 = 80 : = 2 4 = 40 9 = 90. = 13 5 = 50 0 = 00 = 0 Figure 2-14: Keypad Codes (IP-24DH, IP7008D, IP7024LD, & IP7024D Phones) 8. Press [SAVE]. Confirmation tone sounds.

239 System Speed Dial Conditions» Attempts to access an empty speed dial bin will return an error tone.» A Speed Dial number can be assigned to use a CO/IP line/group. If the assigned line is busy, a line from the group will be selected. If all lines in the CO/IP group are busy, the user may queue.» Station Speed Dial numbers are stored in battery backup-protected memory.» The CO/IP line is presented to a direct appearance on an IP Keyset. If there is no direct appearance, the line is presented to the {POOL} or {LOOP} flexible button.» The user may pre-select a CO/IP line that will be used with the Speed Dial number overriding any CO/IP assignment.» At the Name assignment step, IP Keyset LCDs will show, "ENTER NAME". This name is used with the Dial-by Name feature.» If a Speed Dial number contains a Dial Tone detect command ([FLASH] button as 1st digit) and Dial Tone detect is enabled for the CO line, the system must detect dial tone before dialing the Speed Dial number. Related Features CO Line Flash - page Dial By Name - page Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover - page Display Security - page Last Number Redial - page Save Number Redial (SNR) - page Station Call Coverage - page Station Speed Dial - page System Speed Zone Group - page 2-214

240 2-214 System Speed Zone Group System Speed Zone Group Description Up to ten System Speed Zone Groups can be established for access control of System Speed Dial bins. Stations assigned to a System Speed Zone Group are only allowed to use those system speed dial bin numbers that are associated to their group. The System Speed Dial bins within these groups can be programmed to permit or restrict use of speed dial toll calls by specific groups of personnel. Conditions» If a station dials a system speed bin in a System Speed Zone Group other than to the one which assigned, an error tone sounds.» Speed bin numbers in a System Speed Zone Group cannot overlap with speed bin numbers in any other System Speed Zone Group. Related Features Dialing Restrictions, Class of Service - page System Speed Dial - page 2-210

241 Station User Program Codes Station User Program Codes Description IP Keyset users can program functions/features, access status information, and assign special features codes to flexible buttons. The following table lists the Fixed Station User Program Codes that may be used. Note that codes 16-19, 57, 70, 80-89, 8#, and can only be used to assign functions to available flexible buttons. Code Description Entries 11x Intercom Differential Ring Tone x = x CO/IP Differential Ring Tone x = ICM Signaling Mode 1: H, 2: T, 3: P 14x Call Coverage Attribute x = x Station Ring Download x = {MUSIC BELL} button {SMS/NOTICE DISPLAY} button {SCROLL, SPEED} button {EAR-MIC HEADSET} button Knock down Station COS Restore Station COS Auth code 23 Walking COS Auth code 31 Station Msg Wait Retrieve CLI:IP Msg Wait Retrieve User Auth Regist DID Call Wait Choice Exec/Sec Msg Send SMS Message Register Mobile Ext Activate Mibile-Ext Register Mobile CLI Set Wake Up Time (Hour/Min) Once/Permanent 42 Wake Up Disable -- 51xx Set Pre-selected Custom Msg xx = Program Custom Msg (00) msg

242 2-216 Station User Program Codes Code Description Entries 57 {CALL LOG DISPLAY} button Headset/Speakerphone Mode On/Off 62 Headset/Speaker Ring Mode 1: S, 2: H, 3: Both 70 {DST, N-MSG} button LCD Display Mode Domestic/English 72 MFIM Version Display -- 73x Select BGM Source x = Register Station Name "name" 75 Display Phone IP Address Change Phone IP Address Display MAC IP Address Change Mode Display Phone Version {TWO-WAY RECORD} button ISDN {CLIR} button ISDN {COLR} button {ATD DND} button {ACCOUNT CODE} button {LOOP} button {INTRUSION} button {CAMP ON} button ISDN {KEYPAD FACILITY} button -- 8# {OHVO} button {CONF} button {CALL BACK} button {DND} button {FLASH} button {MUTE} button {MONITOR} button {REDIAL} button {FORWARD} button {PUSH-TO-TALK} button -- *# Enter Admin Programming -- *0 Hot Desk Login -- ** Hot Desk Logout --

243 Station User Program Codes A Station User Program Menu Display is provided on the IP Keyset LCD to assist you in programming the User Program Code features and functions.» [VOL ] buttons are used to scroll through the keyset menu items.» Dial Pad keys are used to enter selected options. Dial pad entries are the same as the Fixed Feature Codes in the previous table. TOP-LEVEL MENU PRESS [PGM] TO BEGIN SUB MENUS [1] RING [2] COS [3] MSG RETRIEVE [4] WAKE UP TIME [5] MESSAGE [6] HEADSET [7] SUPPLEMENTARY [ ] SYSTEM [1] STATION RING TYPE [2] CO RING TYPE [3] ANSWER MODE [4] CALL COVER ATTRIBUTE [5] STATION RING DOWNLOAD [1] COS DOWN [2] COS RESTORE [3] WALKING COS [1] STA MSG WAIT RETR [2] CLI:IP MSG WAIT RET [3] USER AUTH REGIST [4] DID CALL WAIT [5] CHOICE EXEC/SEC MSG [6] SEND SMS MESSAGE [7] REG MOBILE EXT [8] ACTIVE MOBILE-EXT [9] REGISTER MOBILE CLI [1] SET WAKE UP TIME [2] WAKE UP DISABLE [1] SET PRE:CUST MSG [2] PGM CUSTOM MSG [1] HEADSET OR SPK MODE [2] HEADSET RING MODE Shown on next page Shown on next page

244 2-218 Station User Program Codes TOP-LEVEL MENU PRESS [PGM] TO BEGIN [1] RING [2] COS [3] MSG RETRIEVE [4] WAKE UP TIME [5] MESSAGE [6] HEADSET [7] SUPPLEMENTARY [ ] SYSTEM SUB MENUS Shown on previous page [1] LCD DISPLAY LANGUAGE [2] MFIM VERSION DISPLAY [3] BGM [4] REGISTER STA NAME [5] DISP PHONE IP ADDR [6] CHANGE PHONE IP ADDR [7] DISPLAY MAC ADDR [8] CHANGE MODE [9] DISP PHONE VERSION [#] ENTER ADMIN [0] HOT DESK LOGIN [ ] HOT DESK LOGO UT Operation To assign a Station User Program Code to a flexible button: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press the desired flexible button. 3. Press [PGM] again. 4. Dial the desired User Program Code and additional inputs that may be required. 5. Press [SAVE]. To activate a Station User Program Code feature or function: 1. Press the preprogrammed flexible button. 2. Dial any additional inputs that may be required. 3. Press [SAVE], if changes were made. -or- 1. Press [PGM]. The User Program Menu displays. 2. Dial the desired User Program Code and additional inputs as required, -or- Use the [VOL ] to display the desired menu item. 3. Dial the digit indicated for the item and additional inputs if required.

245 Station User Program Codes Related Features CPI Message Wait - page Custom Messages - page Headset Compatibility - page Message Wait / Call Back - page Pre-selected Messages - page Station Alarm Clock Station Flexible Buttons - page Station Name Display Temporary Station COS Change (Station Lock) - page Walking COS - page Hardware IP Keyset

246 2-220 Two-Way Record Two-Way Record Description An IP Keyset user may record an active external conversation in the station user s mailbox. A {RECORD} button must be assigned to access this feature. Operation To assign a {RECORD} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [PGM] + [80] + Mailbox Group Number (optional - the VSF is the default if a Mailbox Group Number is not specified) + [SAVE] To activate Two-Way Record while on an CO/IP call: Press the {RECORD} flexible button. Record warning tone sounds and recording starts. To stop Two-Way Record while on an CO/IP call: Press the {RECORD}, [FLASH], [CONF], {DSS} or other conflicting button, -or- Hang up to return to idle. Conditions» The {RECORD} LED will flash while recording.» This feature is available when using the VSF VM, PathFinder IP, or using an external AA/VM employing the SMDI communications mode. When an externalaa/vm system employs the in-band (DTMF) mode, Two-way Record is not available.» When recording starts, the user hears a record warning tone. The warning tone is repeated at 30-second intervals during recording. Related Features Voice Store & Forward (VSF) - page 2-48 Hardware IP Keyset VSF or External AA/VM system

247 Universal Night Answer Universal Night Answer Description Universal Night Answer (UNA) allows a user to answer CO/IP calls while the system is in the Night/Timed ring mode by dialing the UNA code. CO Lines and the IP group are assigned the UNA function. An External Contact (LBC1) can be defined to activate a Loud Bell alerting users of UNA calls. IP Keyset users may assign a flexible button as a {UNA} button. Operation To assign a {UNA} flexible button: [PGM] + {FLEX} + [567] + [SAVE] To access an incoming call using UNA: 1. Lift the handset. Intercom dial tone sounds. 2. Dial the UNA feature dial code [567]. The oldest ringing CO line or IP call will be connected. If there is no ringing line, error tone sounds. -or- 1. Lift the handset. Intercom dial tone sounds. 2. Press the {UNA} flexible button. The oldest ringing CO line or IP call will be connected. If there is no ringing line, error tone sounds. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To access an incoming call using UNA: 1. Lift the handset. Intercom dial tone sounds. 2. Dial the UNA feature dial code [567]. The oldest ringing CO line or IP call will be connected. If there is no ringing line, error tone sounds.

248 2-222 VSF-Voice Mail VSF-Voice Mail Message Storage Description When a station user activates Call Forward to the VSF VM station group, all calls (internal, external, Private line) of the selected call forward type are sent to the VSF. After receiving the User Greeting or the default prompt, the caller can leave a voice message for the called station user. Operation To leave a voice message: 1. Caller calls to a station forwarded to VSF. The caller hears either the user greeting (if recorded) or the no greeting prompt (default prompt). The caller hears the mailbox greeting ("After recording your message, you may hang up or press [ ] for further options") and the "Record Start" prompt. 2. After the beep tone, talk with normal voice. 3. Hang up to quit recording. Conditions» Two timers are provided to control voice message length. The Valid User Message Timer establishes the minimum voice message length. Voice messages shorter than this timer setting are not stored. The VSF User Record Timer establishes the maximum voice message length. When the VSF User Record Timer expires while recording a voice message, a confirmation tone sounds and the message is saved.» If all the channels of VSF are in use, a Ring Back tone is provided until a VSF channel is available.» All stations including an SLT can leave and receive voice messages.» User s Greetings and Voice Mails are protected from AC power loss. Related Features Call Forward - page 2-82 Message Wait / Call Back - page VSF-Voice Mail - page Hardware VSF

249 VSF-Voice Mail Message Retrieval Description Users can access their mailbox functions from a remote location by dialing the telephone number of a DISA-assigned CO line that is assigned to be answered by a VSF Auto Attendant and then pressing [#]. Internal users access their mailbox locally by placing a call to a VSF station group or by pressing the CALL BK button on an IP phone while receiving an Intercom dial tone. The user then receives the "Request for Password" prompt: ("Enter Password"). When a valid password is entered, the user receives the "Number of Messages" prompt, ("You have xx new messages. You have yy saved messages."), and then receives the "VM Long Options" prompt, ("To play new messages, press one. To play saved messages, press two. To set station forwarding, press seven. To set greeting or password, press eight. To disconnect press pound. Press zero for the operator. Press nine to hear this message again."). When the user responds by dialing [1], the most current message is played. At the end of the message, the "New Message Option" prompt is played: ("To replay message, press one. To listen to the next message, press two. To delete message, press three. To forward message, press four. To call the sender, press five. To skip message, press six. To return to main menu, press nine. This process is repeated until the last new message is played, then the prompt ("No messages") is played. When the user dials [2] in response to the "Number of Messages" prompt, the oldest saved message is played. At the end of the message, the "Saved Message Option" prompt is played, ("To replay message, press one. To listen to the next message, press two. To delete message, press three. To forward message, press four. To call the sender, press five. To return to main menu, press nine.") This process is repeated until the last saved message is played, then the prompt ("No messages") is played. When the user dials [9] either in response to the "Number of Messages" prompt, during a message, or at the end of a message, the "VM Long Options" prompt is played.

250 2-224 VSF-Voice Mail Operation To retrieve Voice Mail locally: 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press [CALLBK] to receive the "Mail Box & Password" prompts sequentially. 3. Dial the Mailbox and corresponding password to receive the "Number of Messages" prompt. 4. Dial [1] for new messages, or [2] for saved messages. The appropriate message is played and at completion, the New/Saved Message Complete prompt is received. 5. When the Mailbox session is complete, dial [#] to receive the "Goodbye" prompt. 6. Hang up to return to idle. Conditions» If no new or saved messages are available, pressing [1] or [2] respectively is an invalid operation and the user receives the "Invalid Entry" prompt or "No Messages" prompt.» The user must begin dialing within the Dial Tone Timer limit and subsequent digits must be dialed within the Inter-Digit Timer limit or the "Invalid Entry" prompt is received. After a second invalid entry, the user is disconnected.» If a dialed number is not recognized, the "Invalid Entry" prompt is played. After the second invalid entry, the user is disconnected.» While listening to messages, the user may dial [9] at any time to receive the "VM Long Options" prompt. Related Features Message Retrieval Options - page Remote Message Retrieval - page Hardware VSF

251 VSF-Voice Mail Remote Message Retrieval Description The system permits remote users access to their mailbox. After accessing the VSF Voice Mail, operation follows the local procedures. Operation For a Caller to access a Voice Mailbox from a remote location: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line assigned to answer by a VSF Auto Attendant. 3. Upon answer, dial [#] and receive the "Request for Mailbox number" prompt. 4. Follow local access procedures. Conditions» The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options apply. Related Features Auto Attendant Transfer - page 2-51 Message Retrieval - page Message Retrieval Options - page Hardware VSF

252 2-226 VSF-Voice Mail Message Retrieval Options Description The user may dial a digit during or after a message or after any prompt to activate an option, including the "VM Long Options" prompt. The voice mail will respond to incoming digits as shown in the following table. Digit Function Prompts and Actions 0 Atd Call Call to System Attendant 1 Listen to New Msg The most current message is played and then the following prompt plays: "To replay message, press one. To listen to the next message, press two. To delete message, press three. To forward message, press four. To call the sender press five. To skip message, press six. To return to main menu, press nine. 2 Listen to Saved Msg "To replay message, press one. To listen to the next message, press two. To delete message, press three. To forward message, press four. To call the sender press five. To return to main menu, press nine. 7 Set/Cancel Forward "To forward calls to another extension, press one. To cancel forwarding, press two. To return to the main menu, press nine." 8 Mailbox Settings "To assign a new password press 7, to program your greeting press 4, to program your User Identification/name press 6." 9 Long Options "To play new messages, press one. To play saved messages, press two. To set station forwarding, press seven. To set greeting or password, press eight. To disconnect, press pound. Press zero for the operator. Press nine to hear this message again." # Disconnect "Goodbye." While retrieving new messages, if the user dials: [1], the current message is replayed. [2], the next new message is played after the current message is saved. [3], the current message is deleted. [4], and dials a station number, then the current message is forwarded to the dialed station number. [5], the VSF will place a call (internal or external) to the number that left the message. The number can be an internal station, or an IP address. [6], the current message is left as new, & the next new message is played. [9], the main menu is accessed & the user hears "VM Long Option" prompt.

253 VSF-Voice Mail While retrieving saved messages, if the user dials: [1], the current message is replayed. [2], the next saved message is played. [3], the current message is deleted. [4], and dials a station number, then the current message is forwarded to the dialed station number. [5], the VSF will place a call (internal or external) to the number that left the message. The number can be an internal station, or an IP address. [9], the main menu is accessed & the user hears "VM Long Option" prompt. Operation To access a Message Retrieval option: At any time after the "Number of Messages" prompt, dial a Message Retrieval Option digit. The system initiates the selection providing any needed prompts. Conditions» The user must begin dialing within the Dial tone timer limit and subsequent digits must be dialed within the Inter-Digit Timer limit in response to a system prompt. If either timer expires, the system disconnects the call and the user receives an error tone.» When the call sender option results in an external call, dialing restrictions will be applied based on the Station COS.» If the user remains off-hook after a call placed through the voice mail is complete, the user will be returned to the previous place in the Voice Mailbox. If the user hangs up, the VSF will recall the user and upon answer will play the "Request Mailbox Number" prompt.» To set forward, the user must be external. Related Features Caller ID Class of Service - page Message Retrieval - page Message Wait / Call Back - page Remote Message Retrieval - page Voice Mailbox Settings - page Hardware VSF

254 2-228 VSF-Voice Mail Voice Mailbox Settings Description The user can program the Mailbox settings for their mailbox including a security password, a greeting, and a name. When a user presses [#] while retrieving messages, the "Mailbox Setting" prompt ("To assign a new password press 7, to program your greeting press 4 ). Operation To program Mailbox settings while "in" the Voice Mailbox: Press [#], for Mailbox settings, the "Mailbox Setting" prompt is received. FOR PASSWORD: 1. Dial [7] and receive the "Password Entry" prompt ("Please enter your new personal password."). 2. Dial new password. 3. Press [#] and receive the "Reenter Password" prompt ("To assure proper entry, please reenter your new password."). 4. Dial new password again. 5. Press [#] and receive "Password Confirmation" prompt ("Your password is saved."). FOR GREETING: 1. Dial [4] and receive Greeting Option prompt ("To listen to your present greeting press 5. To record a new greeting, press 7. ). 2. Dial [5], to hear your greeting and "Ready" prompt. -or- Dial [7] and receive "Record Greeting" prompt ("At the tone, record your new greeting. Press # when done."). 3. After beep, record the greeting, speaking in a normal voice. 4. Press [#] and receive "Greeting Confirmation" prompt ("Your greeting is saved."). FOR "MAILBOX SETTING" PROMPT: Dial [0] and receive "Mailbox Setting prompt" ("To assign a new password press 7. To program your greeting press 4"). Conditions» The user must begin dialing within the Dial tone timer, and subsequent digits must be dialed within the Inter-Digit Timer or the user will receive the invalid entry prompt.» If dialed number is not recognized, the "Invalid Entry" prompt is played.» User must assign password (up to 12 digits) before mailbox is activated to store messages. NOTE: A greeting does not need to be programmed.

255 VSF-Voice Mail Related Features Message Retrieval - page Message Retrieval Options - page Message Storage - page Remote Message Retrieval - page Hardware VSF System Voice Memo Description This feature provides several general Voice Memos to provide the system date and time, as well as station number and settings over the IP Keyset speaker or the handset for SLTs. Operation To hear Date & Time Prompt: Dial feature code [661] (MFIME = [ 661]). The announcement for time plays, e.g., "Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm". To hear Station Number Prompt: Dial feature code [662] (MFIME = [ 662]). The station number announcement for station plays, e.g., "This is station 150". To hear Station Settings: Dial feature code [663] (MFIME = [ 663]). Station status is reported. Items are: - Station IP address - Station MAC address - Station ICM mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy) - Listed message x (x: number of all messages waiting)* - Wakeup time (hh:mm)* - Do not disturb* - Forwarded to station xxx* - Forwarded to speed bin xxx* - Queued CO/IP xx* - Locked (temporary COS change)* - COS x

256 2-230 VSF-Voice Mail SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE To hear Date & Time Prompt: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial feature code [661] (MFIME = [ 661]). Announcement plays, e.g., "Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm". To hear Station Number Prompt: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial feature code [662] (MFIME = [ 662]). Announcement plays, e.g., "This is station 150". To hear Station Settings: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial feature code [663] (MFIME = [ 663]). Station status is reported. Items are: - Station IP address - Station MAC address - Station ICM mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy) - Listed message x (x: number of all messages waiting)* - Wakeup time (hh:mm)* - Do not disturb* - Forwarded to station xxx* - Forwarded to speed bin xxx* - Queued CO/IP xx* - Locked (temporary COS change)* - COS x Conditions» For station settings, items marked with an asterisk above are not announced if not active. Hardware MFIM-V (MFIM with VSF)

257 Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Quick Reference Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan The following table shows the Default Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan. To enter user programming, press the [PGM] button on an IP keyset or dial [561] on an SLT. To use the feature codes, enter user programming and then dial the code plus any required digits as specified in the following table. To assign a feature to a flexible button, press [PGM], press the desired flexible button, dial the code plus any required digits as specified in the following table, then press [SAVE]. Feature Account Code Enter (SMDR) (SLT) Numbering Plan Codes Details Page Account Code with bin (SLT) 568+[XX] -- ACD Agent On/Off Duty 571+[XXX]+ Reason Code XXX: ACD Group No ACD Agent Primary Login 581+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Agent Primary Logout 582+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Agent Secondary Login 583+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Agent Secondary Logout 584+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Agent Wrap-up End 585+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Calls In Queue Display 575+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Help Code 574+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Reroute Queued Call w/ Answer ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o Answer ACD Supervisor Login 572+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Supervisor Logout 573+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No ACD Supervisor Monitor 577+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No. 2-60

258 2-232 Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan Codes Clarification Page ACD Supervisor Status Display 576+[XXX] XXX: ACD Group No Alarm Reset Answering Machine Emulation Attendant Call Attendant Unavailable Call Coverage Button 67+[YYY] YYY = Covered Sta No Call Forward 554[A]+[XXX] A: Forward Type 0 - Remote Call 1 - Unconditional 2 - Busy Forward 3 - No Answer 4 - Busy/No Answer 5 - Incoming CO Off-Net # - Clear Forward XXX: Destination No. Call Parking Locations (MFIM/ MFIME) or , Call Pick Up (Direct) 7[XXX] 2-91 Call Pick Up (Group) Camp On / Broker Call (SLT) Cancel DND/Forward/ Preselected Message , CO Line Access (1st Avail Grp) CO Line Access (Group 1-20 for MFIM or 1-72 for MFIME) CO Line / IP Channel Access (Specific) CO Line / IP Channel Access (Individual Held) CO Line / IP Channel Access (Last Held) or [XX] or 88[XXX] 8#[XX] or 8#[XXX] XX: (MFIM) XXX: (MFIME) XX: (MFIM) XXX: (MFIME) * CO System Hold (SLT) Conference - Setup (SLT) Hookflash 2-109

259 Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Feature Conference - Unsupervised Conference Extend Code Numbering Plan Codes Details Page ## DND (Toggle On/Off) (SLT) Door Open (1st Door) #* Door Open (2nd Door) #* Door Open (3rd Door-MFIME) #* Door Open (4th Door-MFIME) #* Flash Cmd to CO Line (SLT) Group Pilot Number (MFIM/ MFIME) or Last Number Redial (Keyset) [REDIAL] Keyset 2-53, Last Number Redial (SLT) MCID Request *0 -- Msg Wait/Callbk Enable (SLT) , Msg Wait/Callbk Return (SLT) Page - All Call (External) Page - All Call (Internal) Page - All Call (Internal/ External) Page - Meet Me Page Zone 1 (External) Page Zone 2 (External) Page Zone 1-10 MFIM or 1-35 MFIME (Internal) or Save Number Redial [SAVE] Keyset Speed Dial Access (Station) Speed Dial Access (System) [SPEED]+[XX] or [SPEED]+[XXX] [SPEED]+[XXX] or [SPEED]+ [XXXX] XX: (MFIM) XXX: (MFIME) XXX: (MFIM) XXXX: (MFIME)

260 2-234 Flexible Feature Code Numbering Plan Feature Speed Dial Access (Station) (SLT) Speed Dial Access (System) (SLT) Speed Dial Bin Prog (SLT) Station Numbers (MFIM/ MFIME) Numbering Plan Codes 558+[XX] or 558+[XXX] 558+[XXX] or 558+[XXXX] 555+[XX] or 555+[XXX] or Clarification (XX: 00-19, MFIM; XXX: , MFIME) (XXX: , MFIM; , MFIME) (XX: 00-19, MFIM; XXX: , MFIME) Page 2-207, , Universal Night Answer User Programming Mode Access Code (SLT) VM Message Waiting Disable (Administrator Use Only) VM Message Waiting Enable (Administrator Use Only) VSF Features (Station User) *9 -- * [X] for MFIM; [ ]+66[X] for MFIME X: 1: Listen Time & Date 2: Listen Sta No. 3: Listen Sta Status Walking COS Code (SLT)

261 Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan To enter user programming, press the [PGM] button on an IP keyset or dial 561 on an SLT. To use the feature codes, enter user programming and then dial the code plus any required digits as specified in the following table. To assign a feature to a flexible button, press [PGM], press the desired flexible button, press [PGM] again, dial the code plus any required digits as specified in the following table, then press [SAVE]. This numbering plan is fixed and cannot be changed in Admin Programming. Keyset User Programming Codes Feature Code Page Activate Mobile Extension Background Music Source (x=0-2) 73x Call Coverage Attribute (x=1-2) 14x Change Mode Change Phone IP Address Choice Exec/Sec Msg CLI / IP Message Wait Retrieve Custom/Preselect Message Display (xx=00-20) 51xx 2-114, DID Call Wait Differential Ring Type (CO) (x=1-8) 12x Differential Ring Type (Station) (x=1-8) 11x Display Phone IP Address Display Phone MAC IP Address Display Phone Version Erase Wakeup Time Headset/Speakerphone Mode (On/Off) Headset/Speaker Ring Mode (1: S, 2: H, 3: Both) Hot Desk Login * Hot Desk Logout ** 2-140

262 2-236 Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan Keyset User Programming Codes Feature Code Page Intercom Answer Mode (1: H, 2: T, 3: P) Knock Down Station COS LCD Display Mode MPB Version Display Register Custom Message (Message 00) Register Mobile CLI Register Mobile Extension Restore Station COS Send SMS Message Set Wakeup Time (Once/Permanent) Station Message Wait Retrieve Station Ring Download (x=0-9) 15x Station User Name Registration User Auth Regist Walking COS Button Assignments Required {ACCOUNT CODE} {ATD DND} {ATD INTRUSION} {CALL BACK} {CALL LOG DISPLAY} {CAMP ON} {CLIR} {CONF} {COLR} {DND} {DST, N-MSG} (EAR-MIC HEADSET} 19 --

263 Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan Keyset User Programming Codes Feature Code Page {FLASH} {FORWARD} {LOOP} {MONITOR} {MUSIC BELL} {MUTE} {OHVO} 8# {PUSH-TO-TALK} {RECORD} - with Voice Mail {REDIAL} {SCROOL, SPEED} {SEND KEYPAD FACILITY IE} {SMS NOTICE DISPLAY} 17 --

264 2-238 Fixed Feature Codes Numbering Plan Attendant User Programming Codes Feature Code Page (s) Abort Print Traffic Analysis (All Summary Periodically) & 2-42 Abort Printing & Attendant Set Wakeup Time Attendant Wakeup Disable Authorization Code Erase & 2-16 Authorization Code Registration & 2-16 Automatic Day/Night/Timed Ring Table Program Custom Message Reg & Delete Lost Call & Delete SMDR (Station Base) & Display Call Charge DND / Call Forward / Preselected Msg Cancel & 2-36 External Page Music - 1: Assignment/Cancel & 2-79 External Page Music - 2: Assignment/Cancel & 2-79 Isolate Fault CO Line & 2-23 LCD Date Mode Setting LCD Display Language LCD Time Mode Setting Preselect Message Set Print Lost Call Print SMDR (Station Base) Print Traffic Analysis (All Summary Periodically) Print Traffic Analysis (All Summary) Print Traffic Analysis (Attendant) Print Traffic Analysis (Auto Attendant) Print Traffic Analysis (Call Hourly & Summary) Print Traffic Analysis (CO/IP Group Summary) Print Traffic Analysis (H/W Usage) Print Traffic Analysis (CO Group Hourly) Register Station Name (for Dial By Name) & Restore Station COS Set ICM Only Mode System Date/Time Mode Setting VSF - Record System Greeting

265 3-1 3 IP7008D Phone This section describes operating procedures unique to the IP7008D Phone.

266

267 Call Pick-up 3-3 Call Pick-up Directed Call Pick-up When you hear a phone ringing in your area: 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial [7]. 3. Dial the extension number of the ringing phone. Group Call Pick-up When hearing an unattended phone ringing in your group, 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial [566]. You will be connected to an incoming extension or outside line call. Calls Placing an Outside Call 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial Dial the desired number. Placing an Intercom Call 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial intercom number. Call Waiting To answer a call waiting, press the flashing CO button. Camp On 1. After receiving intercom busy tone, press Hook flash and dial *. Camp On tone is heard at the called station. 2. When called party answers, talk.

268 3-4 Flexible Button Programming Flexible Button Programming To assign a fixed feature code to a flexible button, press [PGM], press the desired flexible button, press [PGM] again, dial the code plus any required digits as specified in the following table, then press [SAVE]. 1. Press [Trans/Pgm]. 2. Press the flexible button to be programmed. 3. Press [Trans/Pgm], then enter the PGM code number. 4. Press [Hold/Save]. PGM Codes for IP7008D Phones Feature Code Feature Code Account Code PGM 84 DST, N-MSG button 70 ATD DND button 83 ICM Ring Type 11 Auth. Code Register 33 LCD Display Language 71 Background Music 73 LOOP button 85 CALLBK button 92 Mobile EXT - Activate 38 CALL LOG DISPLAY button 57 Mobile EXT - Register 37 CAMP ON button 88 MON button 96 Choice Exec/Sec Msg 35 MPB Version Display 72 CO/IP Ring Tone Type 12 MUSIC BELL button 16 Change Phone IP Address 76 MUTE button 95 Change Phone Mode 78 REDIAL button 97 CONF button 91 Register Mobile CLI 39 COS Down 21 Ring Answer Mode 13 COS Restore 22 SCROLL, SPEED button 18 DID Call Wait PGM 34 Send SMS Message 36 Display Phone IP Address 75 Set Customer MSG 52 Display Phone MAC Address 77 Set Preselected MSG 51 Display Phone version 79 SMS/NOTICE DISPLAY button 17 DND button 93 Speakerphone/Headset 61 EAR-MIC HEADSET button 19 Station Name PGM 74 FLASH button 94 Two way record 80 FWD button 98 Wake-up - Disable 42 Headset/Speaker Ring Mode 62 Wake-up Time - Set 41 Hot Desk Login *0 Walking COS 23 Hot Desk Logout **

269 Hold 3-5 Hold To place an outside call on hold, press [HOLD]. To retrieve an outside call from hold, press the flashing CO button. Last Number Redial 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial [552]. Station Speed Dial Storing a Speed Dial Number 1. Press [TRANS/PGM]. 2. Press [SPEED]. 3. Dial speed bin number. 4. Dial number you wish to store. 5. Press [HOLD]. Confirmation tone sounds. 6. Hang up. Using a Speed Dial Number 1. Press [SPEED]. 2. Dial the desired speed bin number.

270 3-6 Station Speed Dial

271 4-1 4 IP7024D Phone This section describes operating procedures unique to the IP7024D Phone.

272

273 Calls 4-3 Calls Placing a Call Intercom 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Enter the station number. 3. Talk. CO Line 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial [9] or press CO line flexible button. 3. Enter desired phone number. Answering a Call Intercom 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Talk. CO Line 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the flashing CO line flexible button or Loop key. 3. Talk.

274 4-4 Soft Buttons Soft Buttons General Description Three Soft Buttons are located under the LCD display. The Telenium IP system provides a menu of options for each operation. It gives easy access to operations with a navigation key or volume up/down key. For example, when you make an intercom call and the line is busy, operations which are available are displayed: "Message Wait", "Camp On", and "Flash". By pressing one of these 3 soft buttons, you can activate the desired feature. BUSY : STA 100 [CALLBK] CAMP(*) OHVO(#) MSG CAMP-ON FLASH Navigation Key Sometimes the system does not show all options for your particular mode of operation. In this case an arrow will be displayed at the beginning or at the end of the line. Press the Navigation Key in the direction of the arrow to display additional options. STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm FWD CONF REDIAL--> STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm <--ICM

275 Soft Buttons 4-5 Basic Functions The three soft buttons enable you to select various functions based upon your current operating mode. For instance, if you want to select the pickup option while in an idle mode, press the first soft key on the left as shown below. If there are more than three functions, and an arrow displays on the LCD, use a navigation key to move the next or previous function. Idle Mode STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Pickup STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Press the [PICKUP] soft key. STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE Talk.

276 4-6 Soft Buttons Conference CALL TO STA 100 APR 01 XX MSG FLASH 05:34 pm Dial the desired phone number, e.g., 100. Station 100 answers the call. CALL TO STATION 100 APR 01 XX 05:34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE Press the [CONF] soft key. CONFERENCE APR 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL--> Dial the phone number of the desired party, e.g., 104. CALL TO STATION 104 APR 01 XX 05:34 pm MSG FLASH Station 104 answers the call. CALL TO STATION 104 APR 01 XX 05:34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE Press the [CONF] soft key. CONFERENCE APR 01 XX 05:34 pm CONF MUTE You are in a 3-way conference. Do not try to add a 4th party to the conference. If you press [CONF] in an attempt to add a 4th party, you will receive an error tone and when you press [CONF] again to try to return to the conference all parties are disconnected.

277 Soft Buttons 4-7 Redial STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Press the [REDIAL] soft key. > BACK NEXT SEND Press the [NEXT] soft key to scroll to the desired number, then press the [SEND] soft key to make the call. > LINE :00:10 TRANS CONF MUTE--> Talk. Off Hook Mode STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm FWD CONF REDIAL--> FWD: Press the [FWD] soft key to forward a call to another station. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. REDIAL: Press the [REDIAL] soft key to make a last number redial call. STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm <--ICM ICM: Press the [ICM] soft key to retrieve the ICM [HOLD] button.

278 4-8 Soft Buttons Intercom Dialing Mode STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm FLASH FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm <--ICM ICM: Press the [ICM] soft key to retrieve the ICM [HOLD] button. Intercom Ring Back Mode CALL TO STA 100 APR 01 XX MSG FLASH 05:34 pm MSG: Press the [MSG] soft key to leave a message. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Busy Mode BUSY : STA 100 [CALLBK] CAMP (*) OHVO(#) MSG CAMP-ON FLASH MSG: Press the [MSG] soft key to leave a message. CAMP-ON: Press the [CAMP-ON] soft key to send a call waiting tone to a busy station to indicate that they have a call waiting. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Do Not Disturb Mode DO NOT DISTURB STA 100 CALLBK FLASH CALLBK: Press the [CALLBK] soft key to leave the call back request or message. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize.

279 Soft Buttons 4-9 Intercom Dialing Error Mode APR 01 XX FLASH INVALID 05:34 pm FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Receiving Mode CALL FROM STA 104 APR 01 XX DND 05:34 pm DND: Press the [DND] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you. Intercom Talk Mode CALL FROM STA 104 APR 01 XX 05:34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE TRANS: Press the [TRANS] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. MUTE: Press the [MUTE] soft key to disable outgoing speech, but still allow incoming speech to be heard. Press [SPEAKER] to reactivate the microphone. CO Line Busy Mode CO LINE 001 BUSY QUEUING ([CALLBK]) CALLBK CALLBK: Press the [CALLBK] soft key to reserve the CO line.

280 4-10 Soft Buttons CO Dialing / CO Talk Mode LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> TRANS: Press the [TRANS] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. MUTE: Press the [MUTE] soft key to disable outgoing speech, but still allow incoming speech to be heard. Press [SPEAKER] to reactivate the microphone LINE :00:03 <--RECORD FLASH ACNR RECORD: Press the [RECORD] soft key to record the current call. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. ACNR: Press the [ACNR] soft key to set the automatic call number redial. Paging Mode PAGE FROM STA AUG XX 11:54am MEET ME MEET ME: Press the [MEET ME] soft key to answer the current page.

281 Soft Buttons 4-11 Call Log There are three areas within the Call Log function: Received Calls Dialed Calls Lost Calls To enter the Call Log function, press the preprogrammed Call Log flexible button. To make a Call Log flexible button: 1. Press [PGM]. 2. Press the desired flexible button to be programmed. 3. Press [PGM]. 4. Enter feature code [57]. 1. RECEIVED CALL 2. DIALED CALL OK RECEIVED CALL: Received call list. DIALED CALL: Dialed call list. 3. LOST CALL ^ OK LOST CALL: CLI message wait List.

282 4-12 Soft Buttons Received Call To enter the Call Log function, press the preprogrammed Call Log flexible button. 1. RECEIVED CALL 2. DIALED CALL OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key /01 09:02 BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> The call is placed. The "Back" soft key returns you to the previous display.

283 Soft Buttons 4-13 Dialed Call To enter the Call Log function, press the preprogrammed Call Log flexible button. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Dialed Call. 1. RECEIVED CALL 2. DIALED CALL OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key /01 09:02 BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> The call is placed. The "Back" soft key returns you to the previous display.

284 4-14 Soft Buttons Lost Call To enter the Call Log function, press the preprogrammed Call Log flexible button. Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select Lost Call. 3. LOST CALL ^ OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key /01 09:02 BACK SELECT> ANSWER Press the [SELECT] soft key to scroll through the following options: DEL CUR, DEL ALL, SAVE, NAME/TEL. The "Back" soft key returns you to the previous display. ANSWER /01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> ANSWER Press the [ANSWER] soft key to make a call to the CLI number LINE XXX 00:00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> The call is placed.

285 Soft Buttons 4-15 DEL CUR /01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> DEL CUR Press the [DEL CUR] soft key to erase the current message. STA 100 (T) FEB 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL The LCD reverts to the idle display. The "Back" soft key returns you to the previous display. DEL ALL /01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> DEL ALL Press the [DEL ALL] soft key. ALL CLI DELETE Press HOLD Key BACK SELECT> DEL ALL Press the [HOLD] button. All current messages are erased.

286 4-16 Soft Buttons SAVE /01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> SAVE Press the [SAVE] soft key to save CLI. D ENTER SPD BIN NO (000) CLI MSG USED PAUSE FLASH D-TONE Press the [HOLD] button or the [OK] navigation key. The CLI is registered to a speed dial bin (refer to Speed Program on page 4-38). NAME/TEL /01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> NAME/TEL Press the [NAME/TEL] soft key to check the name associated with the selected number. EDWARD 02/01 09:02 CNT :01 BACK SELECT> NAME/TEL Press the [NAME/TEL] soft key again to check the number associated with the selected name.

287 Soft Buttons 4-17 Menu Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Menu options. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Menu options. 3. SPEED PROGRAM 4. MOBILE EXTENSION PGM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Menu options. 3. SPEED PROGRAM 4. MOBILE EXTENSION PGM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Menu options. 5. HOT DESK PROGRAM OK

288 4-18 Soft Buttons Basic Program Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Basic Program options. 3. MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM 4. PASSWORD PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Basic Program options. 3. MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM 4. PASSWORD PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Basic Program options. 5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM 6. ENBLOCK MODE BACK OK

289 Soft Buttons LANGUAGE PROGRAM 6. ENBLOCK MODE BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. STATION NAME PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select the Station Name Program option. ENTER NAME BACK OK Enter your name (refer to page 2-190).

290 4-20 Soft Buttons RING PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to select Ring Program. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. 1. ICM RING 2. CO RING BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. RING TYPE : 01 (01-08) SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key until you select the desired ring type. RING TYPE : 02 (01-08) SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. The ring type is changed. Use the same procedure to set the CO Ring type as described for setting the ICM ring type.

291 Soft Buttons 4-21 MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select the Mode (H/T/P) Program option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. 3. MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM 4. PASSWORD PROGRAM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. TONE MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to scroll through the options: Private Mode Handsfree Mode Tone Mode. PRIVATE MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to change to the selected mode.

292 4-22 Soft Buttons STATION 100 (P) FEB 01 XX 05:34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Private Mode: Three bursts of tone sounds and one-way announcement can be made by caller. The caller cannot hear your conversation. Handsfree Mode: Three bursts of tone sounds and an announcement. Reply handsfree or lift handset for privacy. Tone Mode: Repeated bursts of intercom tone ringing and the HOLD button slowly flashes. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button to answer. PASSWORD PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key 3 times to select the Password Program option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. 3. MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM 4. PASSWORD PROGRAM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

293 Soft Buttons 4-23 PASSWORD REGISTER > PASSWORD RESGISTER SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select the password register. Then press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. ENTER PASSWORD: BACK Enter password. e.g., PRESS OK KEY BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. Password Change Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key 3 times to select the Password Program option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

294 4-24 Soft Buttons 3. MODE (H/T/P) PROGRAM 4. PASSWORD PROGRAM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. > PASSWORD CHANGE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select password change. Then press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD: BACK Enter the current password. e.g., ENTER PASSWORD: BACK Enter the new password. e.g., PRESS OK KEY BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

295 Soft Buttons 4-25 LANGUAGE PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key 4 times to select the Language Program option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. 5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM 6. ENBLOCK MODE BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. > ENGLISH LCD LANGUAGE BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key. > KOREAN LCD LANGUAGE BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to change to the selected language.

296 4-26 Soft Buttons ENBLOCK MODE PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Basic Program. 1. STATION NAME PROGRAM 2. RING PROGRAM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key 5 times to select the Enblock Mode option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. 5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM 6. ENBLOCK MODE BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. ENBLOCK MODE > OFF BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select ON/OFF. ENBLOCK MODE > ON BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

297 Soft Buttons 4-27 Advanced Program Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the menu options. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the menu options. 3. STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the menu options. 3. STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the menu options. 5. EAR MIC PROGRAM OK

298 4-28 Soft Buttons WAKE UP PROGRAM Setting: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Wake Up Program. ENTER YOUR WAKEUP TIME HH:MM 10:10 am BACK ERASE OK Enter the time in military format (e.g., 0700 for 7 a.m., 1900 for 7 p.m.) and select one day or every day. S = One day (default) C = Every day (press # to specify every day) ENTER YOUR WAKEUP TIME 07:00-C 10:11 am BACK ERASE OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. STATION 100 (T) FEB 01 XX *10:12 am PICKUP CONF REDIAL The [*] in front of the time blinks while in idle status.

299 Soft Buttons 4-29 WAKEUP RING FEB 01 XX *07:00 am The bell rings at 7:00 a.m. in this example. Cancelling: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Wake Up Program. ENTER YOUR WAKEUP TIME 07:00-S 10:10 am BACK ERASE OK Press the [ERASE] button. ERASED WAKEUP TIME 07:00-S *10:11 am BACK ERASE OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

300 4-30 Soft Buttons PRESELECTED MSG PROGRAM The following preselected message types are available. 00 = USER CUSTOM MSG = LUNCH RETURN AT XX:XX 02 = ON VACATION / RETURN AT DATE XX:XX 03 = OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN AT TIME XX:XX 04 = OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN AT DATE XX:XX 05 = OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN UNKNOWN 06 = CALL TO (PHONE NO : Max 17 digits) 07 = IN OFFICE STA *** 08 = IN A MEETING / RETURN AT TIME XX:XX 09 = AT HOME 10 = AT BRANCH OFFICE Select a preselected message: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to select the Preselected MSG PGM option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Preselected Message Program. SELECT BY UP/DOWN KEY BACK Press either the volume up/down button or the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys to select the desired type.

301 Soft Buttons 4-31 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME XX:XX BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. ENTER TIME HH:MM BACK Enter the time. 7:30 a.m. = :30 p.m. = 1930 ENTER TIME 07:30 PRESS OK KEY BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME 07:30 BACK CONF OK The selected message is displayed.

302 4-32 Soft Buttons Cancel/Change a programmed preselected message: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to select the Preselected MSG PGM option. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Preselected Message Program. OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME XX:XX BACK ERASE OK Press the [ERASE] soft key to cancel the preselected message and return to the message select mode. Press the [BACK] soft key to return to the previous LCD. Press the [OK] soft key to return to the enter time mode. SELECT BY UP/DOWN KEY Message select mode. BACK

303 Soft Buttons 4-33 STATION COS PROGRAM There are three types of COS programming: COS Down Mode Restore COS Mode Walking COS Mode COS Down Mode: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select the Station COS option. 3. STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Station COS mode. > COS DOWN MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select the COS Down Mode. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

304 4-34 Soft Buttons > COS DOWN MODE ICM ONLY MODE BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key and the mode is changed. Restore COS Mode: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select the Station COS option. 3. STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Station COS Program. > RESTORE COS MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select the Restore COS Mode. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

305 Soft Buttons 4-35 ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD BACK Enter the password to change RESTORE COS MODE. ORIGINAL COS RESTORED PRESS OK KEY BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. Walking COS Mode: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select the Station COS option. 3. STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Station COS Program.

306 4-36 Soft Buttons > WALKING COS MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select the Walking COS Mode. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. ENTER COS OVERRIDE CODE Enter the COS override code, e.g., BACK ENTER COS OVERRIDE CODE PRESS OK KEY BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key three times to select the SPK/Headset Program option.

307 Soft Buttons STATION COS 4. SPK/HEADSET PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Spk/Headset Program. SPEAKER MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select either Speaker Mode or Headset Mode. SPEAKER MODE SELECT BY [NEXT] BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. EAR MIC PROGRAM Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Advanced Program. 1. BASIC PROGRAM 2. ADVANCED PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Advanced Program menu. 1. WAKE UP PROGRAM 2. PRESELECTED MSG PGM BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key four times to select the Ear Mic Program option.

308 4-38 Soft Buttons 5. EAR MIC PROGRAM BACK ^ OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Ear Mic Program. EAR-MIC HEADSET > ON BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select either ON or OFF. EAR-MIC HEADSET > OFF BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. Speed Program Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select the Speed Program option. 3. SPEED PROGRAM 4. MOBILE EXTENSION PGM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter the Speed Program. ENTER SPD BIN NO(000) BACK Enter the speed bin number, e.g., 007.

309 Soft Buttons 4-39 > ENTER CO-BIN/DIGIT(007) BACK DELETE Enter CO access code and the phone number, e.g., "9" Note: Press the [DELETE] soft key to delete a previously established bin number. > SPEED 007 BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. > ENTER NAME (SPD 007) BACK OK Enter the name. >ABC ENTER NAME (SPD 007) BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

310 4-40 Soft Buttons Mobile Extension Program To program the mobile extension number: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key three times to select the Mobile Extension PGM option. 3. SPEED PROGRAM 4. MOBILE EXTENSION PGM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Mobile Extension Program. 1. MOBILE-EXT. NUM PGM 2. MOBILE-EXT. ENABLE ^ BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. > MOBILE EXT. TEL NO. BACK OK Enter the mobile number, e.g., > MOBILE EXT. TEL NO. BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

311 Soft Buttons 4-41 To enable the mobile extension: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key three times to select the Mobile Extension PGM option. 3. SPEED PROGRAM 4. MOBILE EXTENSION PGM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Mobile Extension Program. 1. MOBILE-EXT. NUM PGM 2. MOBILE-EXT. ENABLE ^ BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to select Mobile-Ext. Enable. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key. MOBILE EXT. USAGE > OFF BACK NEXT OK Press the [NEXT] soft key or the "Up" navigation key to select either ON or OFF. MOBILE EXT. USAGE > ON BACK NEXT OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key.

312 4-42 Soft Buttons Hot Desk Program Hot Desk Log In: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key four times to select the Mobile Extension PGM option. 5. HOT DESK PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select the Hot Desk Program. 1. HOT DESK LOG IN 2. HOT DESK LOG OUT ^ BACK OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Hot Desk Log In. DUMMY STATION 100 ENTER PASSWORD To register this dummy station as STA 169, enter password of STA 169, e.g., STATION 169 (T) 06 SEP XX 04:00 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL

313 Soft Buttons 4-43 Hot Desk Log Out: Press the "Up" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key four times to select the Mobile Extension PGM option. 5. HOT DESK PROGRAM OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Mobile Extension Program. 1. HOT DESK LOG IN 2. HOT DESK LOG OUT ^ BACK OK Press the "Down" navigation key to select Hot Desk Log Out. Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to Log Out. AGENT LOGOUT WITH NO FORWARD CHANGE Press either the volume up/down button or the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys to select the desired forward type, then press the [OK] navigation key. Forward types: NO FORWARD CHANGE FORWARD TO VSF... FORWARD TO VM... FORWARD TO SPD000 FORWARD TO MOBILE-EXT DUMMY STATION SEP XX 10:43 am PICKUP CONF REDIAL

314 4-44 Soft Buttons Phone Book Press the "Down" navigation key to access the Phone Book programming menu. 1. DIAL BY ICM NAME 2. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME OK Press the "Down" navigation key to scroll through the Phone Book menu options. 3. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME OK Dial By ICM Name Press the "Down" navigation key to access the programming Menu. 1. DIAL BY ICM NAME 2. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to select Dial By ICM Name. 1. ANN (105) 2. ANNA (106) BACK SEND Press either the volume up/down button or the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys to select the desired number, then press the [SEND] soft key to make a call. CALL TO ANNA 06 SEP XX 04:06 pm MSG FLASH Talk.

315 Soft Buttons 4-45 Dial By STA SPD Name Press the "Down" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key to select Dial By STA SPD Name. 1. DIAL BY ICM NAME 2. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter Dial By ICM Name. 1. ABC(001) 2. DEF(002) BACK NAME/TEL SEND To check the number of the selected name, press the [NAME/TEL] soft key. Press either the volume up/down button or the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys to select the desired number, then press the [SEND] soft key to make a call LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> Talk.

316 4-46 Soft Buttons Dial By SYS SPD Name Press the "Down" navigation key to access the programming Menu. Press the "Down" navigation key twice to select Dial By SYS SPD Name. 3. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME ^ OK Press the [OK] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to enter Dial By SYS SPD Name. 1. TEAM1(2000) 2. TEAM2(2001) BACK NAME/TEL SEND To check the number of the selected name, press the [NAME/TEL] soft key. Press either the volume up/down button or the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys to select the desired number, then press the [SEND] soft key to make a call LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> Talk.

317 5-1 5 IP7024LD Phone This chapter describes operating procedures unique to the IP7024LD Phone.

318

319 Calls 5-3 Calls Placing a Call Intercom 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Enter the station number. 3. Talk. CO Line 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial [9] or press CO line flexible button. 3. Enter desired phone number. Answering a Call Intercom 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Talk. CO Line 1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER]. 2. Press the flashing CO line flexible button or Loop key. 3. Talk.

320 5-4 Icons Icons The following icons will display at the top of the phone s LCD to indicate the mode of operation. Icon Description Icon Description You have received a message. Alarm is set Call forward Schedule DND mode Phone book Earphone mode On: already paired but linked-radio with headset Full duplex speakerphone mode Steady On: ready to make and answer a call Blinking: ongoing communication via Bluetooth headset Mute mode

321 Soft Buttons & Navigation Key 5-5 Soft Buttons & Navigation Key General Description Three Soft Buttons are located under the LCD display. The Telenium IP system provides a menu of options for each operation. It gives easy access to operations with a navigation key or volume up/down key. For example, when you make an intercom call and the line is busy, operations which are available are displayed: "Message Wait", "Camp On", and "Flash". By pressing one of these 3 soft buttons, you can activate the desired feature. BUSY : STA 100 [CALLBK] CAMP(*) OHVO(#) MSG CAMP-ON FLASH Navigation Key Sometimes the system does not show all options for your particular mode of operation. In this case an arrow will be displayed at the beginning or at the end of the line. Press the Navigation Key in the direction of the arrow to display additional options. STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm FWD CONF REDIAL--> STATION 100 (T) APR 01 XX 05:34 pm <--ICM

322 5-6 Basic Functions Basic Functions The three soft buttons enable you to select various functions based upon your current operating mode. For instance, if you want to select the pickup option while in an idle mode, press the first soft key on the left as shown below. If there are more than three functions, and an arrow displays on the LCD, use a navigation key to move the next or previous function. Idle Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Pickup SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Press the [PICKUP] soft key.

323 Basic Functions 5-7 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STA 104 FROM 100 TRANS CONF MUTE Talk. Conference SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STA 100 MAY :34 pm MSG FLASH Dial the desired phone number, e.g., 100. Station 100 answers the call. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STATION 100 MAY :34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE Press the [CONF] soft key.

324 5-8 Basic Functions SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CONFERENCE MAY :34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL--> Dial the phone number of the desired party, e.g., 104. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STATION 104 MAY :34 pm MSG FLASH Station 104 answers the call. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STATION 104 MAY :34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE Press the [CONF] soft key.

325 Basic Functions 5-9 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CONFERENCE MAY :34 pm CONF MUTE You are in a 3-way conference. Do not try to add a 4th party to the conference. If you press [CONF] in an attempt to add a 4th party, you will receive an error tone and when you press [CONF] again to try to return to the conference all parties are disconnected.

326 5-10 Basic Functions Redial SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm PICKUP CONF REDIAL Press the [REDIAL] soft key. DIALED CALLS Select the desired dialed call by using the "Down" navigation key, then press either the [SEND] soft key or the [OK] navigation key to make the call. BACK DETAIL SEND DIALED CALLS /01 10: Or, press the [DETAIL] soft key to show the detailed information of dialed calls prior to pressing the [SEND] soft key to make the call. BACK SEND

327 Basic Functions 5-11 Off Hook Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm FWD CONF REDIAL--> FWD: Press the [FWD] soft key to forward a call to another station. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. REDIAL: Press the [REDIAL] soft key to make a last number redial call. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm <--ICM ICM: Press the [ICM] soft key to retrieve the ICM [HOLD] button. Intercom Dialing Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / STATION 100 (T) MAY :34 pm FLASH FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize.

328 5-12 Basic Functions Intercom Ring Back Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO STA 100 MAY MSG FLASH 05:34 pm MSG: Press the [MSG] soft key to leave a message. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Busy Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / BUSY : STA 100 [CALLBK] CAMP (*) OHVO(#) MSG CAMP-ON FLASH MSG: Press the [MSG] soft key to leave a message. CAMP-ON: Press the [CAMP-ON] soft key to send a call waiting tone to a busy station to indicate that they have a call waiting. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize.

329 Basic Functions 5-13 Intercom Do Not Disturb Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / DO NOT DISTURB STA 100 CALLBK FLASH CALLBK: Press the [CALLBK] soft key to leave the call back request or message. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Dialing Error Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / MAY FLASH INVALID 05:34 pm FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. Intercom Receiving Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL FROM STA 104 MAY :34 pm DND DND: Press the [DND] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you.

330 5-14 Basic Functions Intercom Talk Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL FROM STA 104 MAY :34 pm TRANS CONF MUTE TRANS: Press the [TRANS] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. MUTE: Press the [MUTE] soft key to disable outgoing speech, but still allow incoming speech to be heard. Press [SPEAKER] to reactivate the microphone. CO Line Busy Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CO LINE 001 BUSY QUEUING ([CALLBK]) CALLBK CALLBK: Press the [CALLBK] soft key to reserve the CO line.

331 Basic Functions 5-15 CO Dialing / CO Talk Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO LINE :00:03 TRANS CONF MUTE--> TRANS: Press the [TRANS] soft key to prevent other parties from disturbing you. CONF: Press the [CONF] soft key to make a conference call. MUTE: Press the [MUTE] soft key to disable outgoing speech, but still allow incoming speech to be heard. Press [SPEAKER] to reactivate the microphone. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CALL TO LINE :00:03 <--RECORD FLASH ACNR RECORD: Press the [RECORD] soft key to record the current call. FLASH: Press the [FLASH] soft key to disconnect the line and reseize. ACNR: Press the [ACNR] soft key to set the automatic call number redial.

332 5-16 Phone Book Paging Mode SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / PAGE FROM STA 103 MAY :54am MEET ME MEET ME: Press the [MEET ME] soft key to answer the current page. Phone Book The Phone Book is used to register new phone numbers and to search for, correct, and delete stored phone numbers. To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Sel. To access the second page of the Phone Book menu, press the "Down" navigation key.

333 Phone Book 5-17 PHONE BOOK 6. Delete All Entry s Exit Sel. New Entry To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK Press [1] to access a New Entry menu. 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Sel. New Entry Name :JANE Type :Mobile CO Code :Not Use Number : Group :No Gr. Back ABC Save Enter the name, using the ABC soft key to cycle through: "ABC" for uppercase letters "abc" for lowercase letters "Num" for numeric digits "Sym" for various symbols Note: Refer to Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) on page Press the "Down" navigation key to move to the next field.

334 5-18 Phone Book New Entry Name :Jane Type : Mobile CO Code :Not Use Number : Group :No Gr. Back Save Enter the Type by using the "Left" or "Right" navigation keys to scroll through: Mobile Office Home Fax Address Memo Press the "Down" navigation key to move to the next field. New Entry Name :Jane Type :Mobile CO Code : Not Use Number : Group :No Gr. Back Save Enter the CO Code by using the "Left" or "Right" navigation key to scroll through: Not Use Code-1 Code-2 Code-3 Code-4 Code-5 Enter the code used to access your CO line, e.g. [9] or [801]. Note: If the Type was designated as , Address, or Memo in the preceding step, "Not Use" will be displayed and you cannot select a CO access code. Press the "Down" navigation key to move to the next field. New Entry Name :Jane Type :Mobile CO Code :Code-1 Number : Group :No Gr. Back Save Enter the phone number. Press the "Down" navigation key to move to the next field.

335 Phone Book 5-19 New Entry Name :Jane Type :Mobile CO Code :Not Use Number : Group : No Gr. Back Save Enter the Group type by using the "Left" or "Right" navigation key to scroll through: No Gr Family Friend Office School Senior Junior Press the [Save] soft key to save the new entry. Search By Name To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Find Press [2] to access a Search By Name dialog box. Enter the full name or a partial name, e.g., just the first character, then press the [Find] soft key. Note: Refer to Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) on page Results 002 : ANNA 003 : ABRAHAM Mobile Back Edit Send A list of names that match the search are displayed. Use the "Down" navigation key to select the desired name. Press the [Edit] soft key if you want to correct the phone number. Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation key to select the type of phone number. Press the [Send] soft key to make a call.

336 5-20 Phone Book Search By Number To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Find Press [3] to access a Search By Number dialog box. Enter the full number or a partial number, e.g., just the first three digits, then press the [Find] soft key. Results 002 : ANNA 003 : ABRAHAM Mobile Back Edit Send A list of names that match the search are displayed. Use the "Down" navigation key to select the desired name. Press the [Edit] soft key if you want to correct the phone number. Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation key to select the type of phone number. Press the [Send] soft key to make a call.

337 Phone Book 5-21 Search By Group To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Find Press [4] to access a Search By Number dialog box. Use the "Down" navigation key to select the desired group, then press the [Find] soft key. Results 002 : ANNA 003 : ABRAHAM Mobile Back Edit Send A list of names that match the search are displayed. Use the "Down" navigation key to select the desired name. Press the [Edit] soft key if you want to correct the phone number. Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation key to select the type of phone number. Press the [Send] soft key to make a call.

338 5-22 Phone Book Register CO Access Code To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Codet Exit Sel. Press [5] to access a Search By Number dialog box. CO Access Code Code-1: 9 Code-2: 8801 Code-3: Code-4: Code-5: Back Save Use the "Down" navigation key to select the code. Enter the CO Access Code. Press the [Save] soft key to save. The entered CO Access Code is entered when the phone number registers or corrects.

339 Phone Book 5-23 Delete All Entries To access the Phone Book, press the "Down" navigation key. PHONE BOOK 1. New Entry 2. Search By Name 3. Search By Number 4. Search By Group 5. Reg. CO Access Code t Exit Sel. Press the "Down" navigation key to access menu item 6. PHONE BOOK 6. Delete All Entry s Press [6] to access the Delete All Entry dialog box. Press the "Down" navigation key to select "Yes" that you do want to delete all data in the Phone Book. Press the [Sel.] soft key to delete all data. Exit Sel.

340 5-24 Menu Button Function Menu Button Function To access the Menu, press the "Up" soft key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING EXIT Ez Menu To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE BACK EXIT

341 Menu Button Function 5-25 Dialed Calls To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [1] to access the Dialed Call list. BACK EXIT DIALED CALL BACK DETAIL SEND Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired phone number. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the selected number. Press the [DETAIL] soft key, if desired, to check details of the selected number before pressing [SEND] to dial the number.

342 5-26 Menu Button Function Received Calls To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [2] to access the Received Call list. BACK EXIT RECEIVED CALL BACK DETAIL SEND Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired phone number. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the selected number. Press the [DETAIL] soft key, if desired, to check details of the selected number before pressing [SEND] to dial the number.

343 Menu Button Function 5-27 Speed Dial Dial By STA SPD To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [3] to access the Speed Dial list. BACK EXIT 1. DIAL BY STA SPD 2. DIAL BY SYS SPD 3. DIAL BY ICM NAME 4. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME 5. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME Press [1] to access the Dial By STA SPD list. BACK EXIT

344 5-28 Menu Button Function 1234 (001) 4567 (002) 5678 (003) Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired station speed number. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the selected number. Press the [NAME/TEL] soft key, if desired, to check the name of the selected number before pressing [SEND] to dial the number. BACK NAME/TEL SEND Dial By SYS SPD To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [3] to access the Speed Dial list. BACK EXIT

345 Menu Button Function DIAL BY STA SPD 2. DIAL BY SYS SPD 3. DIAL BY ICM NAME 4. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME 5. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME Press [2] to access the Dial By SYS SPD list. BACK EXIT (001) (002) (003) Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired station speed number. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the selected number. BACK NAME/TEL SEND Dial By ICM Name To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT

346 5-30 Menu Button Function 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [3] to access the Speed Dial list. BACK EXIT 1. DIAL BY STA SPD 2. DIAL BY SYS SPD 3. DIAL BY ICM NAME 4. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME 5. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME Press [3] to access the Dial By ICM Name list. BACK EXIT JANE (001) ROBERT (002) HECTOR (003) Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired ICM Name. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the number of the selected name. BACK NAME/TEL SEND

347 Menu Button Function 5-31 Dial By STA SPD Name To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [3] to access the Speed Dial list. BACK EXIT 1. DIAL BY STA SPD 2. DIAL BY SYS SPD 3. DIAL BY ICM NAME 4. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME 5. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME Press [4] to access the Dial By STA SPD Name list. BACK EXIT

348 5-32 Menu Button Function JANE (001) ROBERT (002) HECTOR (003) Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired ICM Name. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the number of the selected name. BACK NAME/TEL SEND Dial By SYS SPD Name To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [3] to access the Speed Dial list. BACK EXIT

349 Menu Button Function DIAL BY STA SPD 2. DIAL BY SYS SPD 3. DIAL BY ICM NAME 4. DIAL BY STA SPD NAME 5. DIAL BY SYS SPD NAME Press [5] to access the Dial By SYS SPD Name list. BACK EXIT JANE (2002) ROBERT (2004) HECTOR (2001) Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired ICM Name. Press the [SEND] soft key to dial the number of the selected name. BACK NAME/TEL SEND

350 5-34 Menu Button Function Call Forward To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [4] to access the Call Forward menu. BACK EXIT 1. UNCOND.FWD 0. REMOTE FWD 2. BUSY FWD #. CANCEL FWD 3. NO ANS FWD 4. BUSY/NO ANS 5. IN-CO OFFNET ENTER FORWARD TYPE (0-5, #) BACK EXIT Select the type of forward from 0-5. To cancel forwarding, press [#]. 1. UNCOND.FWD 0. REMOTE FWD 2. BUSY FWD #. CANCEL FWD 3. NO ANS FWD 4. BUSY/NO ANS 5. IN-CO OFFNET UNCONDITIONAL FORWARD ENTER STA/HUNT/SPD BACK EXIT Enter the forward destination number (station, hunt group, or speed bin).

351 Menu Button Function 5-35 Absent Message To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [5] to access the Absent Message menu. BACK EXIT 01. LUNCH RETURN AT HH:MM 02. ON VACATION 03. OUT OF OFFICE HH:MM 04. OUT OF OFFICE MM:DD 05. OUT OF OFFICE ENTER MESSAGE NO BACK NEXT CANCEL Select the desired message from by scrolling with the "Up"/"Down" navigation keys or by dialing the 2-digit message number. press the [NEXT] soft key to access messages Press the [CANCEL] soft key to cancel a previously activated message.

352 5-36 Menu Button Function 01. LUNCH RETURN AT HH:MM 02. ON VACATION 03. OUT OF OFFICE HH:MM 04. OUT OF OFFICE MM:DD 05. OUT OF OFFICE ENTER TIME HH:MM BACK SAVE EXIT If a message has a date/time associated, enter the appropriate digits after selecting the message. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save and activate the message. Paging To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [6] to access the Paging menu. BACK EXIT

353 Menu Button Function INTERNAL 6. ALL (INT+EXT) 2. INT ALL 3. EXT ZONE 1 4. EXT ZONE 2 5. EXT ALL ENTER INT PAGE NO (01-35) BACK EXIT Select the desired paging type from 1-6 by scrolling with the navigation keys or by dialing the 1-digit message number. 1. INTERNAL 6. ALL (INT+EXT) 2. INT ALL 3. EXT ZONE 1 4. EXT ZONE 2 5. EXT ALL ENTER INT PAGE NO (01-35) BACK EXIT If the internal paging type is selected, dial the desired page zone number. Start paging by lifting the handset and announce the page. Replace handset when finished Do Not Disturb To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE BACK EXIT Press [7] to activate and deactivate the Do Not Disturb feature. This is the same as pressing the fixed feature DND button. Note: The station must be allowed to use the Do Not Disturb feature in administrative programming (PGM 111, Btn 3).

354 5-38 Menu Button Function Wake Up To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [1] to access the Ez Menu. EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE Press [8] to access the Wake Up menu. BACK EXIT 1. DIALED CALL 6. PAGING 2. RECEIVED CALL 7. DO NOT DISTURB 3. SPEED DIAL 8. WAKE UP 4. CALL FORWARD 5. ABSENT MESSAGE HH:MM-S BACK EXIT Dial a 4-digit wake up time, e.g for 7 a.m. or 1900 for 7 p.m. The system defaults to providing the alarm for a single occurrence and this is represented by an "S" after the time, e.g., 0700-S. To change the alarm to sound every day, press [#] after entering the time - the display will show a "C" following your designated time to represent continuous. Press [SAVE] to activate the wake up alarm. To cancel a wake up alarm, access the Wake Up menu and press [SAVE].

355 Menu Button Function 5-39 Phone Book To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [2] to access the Phone Book Menu. The Menu Button is another way to access the Phone Book menu. Refer to Phone Book on page 5-16 for detailed information. EXIT Schedule Up to 50 scheduled events can be added. The Schedule s calendar covers the years of 1960 to To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT 1. Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Exit Sel.

356 5-40 Menu Button Function Schedule Add/Delete/Edit To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT 1. Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Press [1] to access the Schedule Add/Del/Edit area. A calendar displays with the current date selected. Exit Sel. Schedule Press [1] to select a calendar 1 year ago. Press [3] to select a calendar 1 year ago. Press [7] to select a calendar 1 month ago. Press [3] to select a calendar 1 year ago. Press the navigation keys to select a date on the currently displayed month. SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / Back Today Sel. Note: If you have moved off of the current date and want to return to the current date, press either [5] or the [Today] soft key. When you have selected the desired date, press the [Sel.] soft key.

357 Menu Button Function 5-41 Schedule Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Press the [Add] soft key. No Schedule Back Add Schedule Add Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Time: [pm] 1830 Rep: None Alarm: None Text: Enter the time. Press the "Down" navigation key. Back Save Schedule Add Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Time: [pm] 1830 Rep: None Alarm: None Text: Back Save Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation keys to select a repeat option: None day week month Press the "Down" navigation key. Schedule Add Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Time: [pm] 1830 Rep: None Alarm: None Text: Press the [Set] soft key to set an alarm, if desired. Back Set Save

358 5-42 Menu Button Function Schedule Add Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Time: [pm] 1830 Rep: None Alarm: 01 Hr 00 Min Before Text: Enter the desired time prior to the event that you want the alarm to sound in hours and minutes. Press the "Down" navigation key. Back Set Save Schedule Add Date: 2005/05/02 Mon Time: [pm] 1830 Rep: None Alarm: 01 Hr 00 Min Before Text: Conference Enter the desired text to identify the event. Refer to Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) on page Press the [Save] soft key to save the scheduled event. Back Set Save Find Schedule To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT

359 Menu Button Function Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Press [2] to access the Find Schedule area. Exit Sel. Find Schedule Search : SCHEDULE Year : 2005 Month : 05 Text: Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation keys to select the desired year. Press the "Down" navigation key. Back All Find Find Schedule Search : SCHEDULE Year : 2005 Month : 05 Text: Press the "Left" or "Right" navigation keys to select the desired year. Press the [Find] soft key and the results will display. Back All Find Results DATE : 2005/05/02 (Mon) 1/3 [AM] 06:30 DENTAL APPT [AM] 08:00 STAFF MTG [PM] 06:30 CONFERENCE Press the "Down" navigation key to select the desired event. Press the [View] soft key to display details of the event. Back View

360 5-44 Menu Button Function Delete Past Schedule To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT 1. Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Press [3] to access the Delete Past Schedule area. Exit Sel. Past Schedule PAST SCHEDULE : 02 Back Del Press the [Del] soft key to delete schedule events from the past. A confirm window displays. Use the "Down" navigation key to select "Yes" that you do want to delete the data, then press the [OK] navigation key.

361 Menu Button Function 5-45 Check Alarm Schedule When the stored scheduled event time arrives, the schedule icon will display at the top of your LCD and the words "CHECK SCHEDULE" will display in the lower portion of the LCD. If an alarm has also been set, it will ring briefly. To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT 1. Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Press [4] to access the Check Alarm Schedule area. Exit Sel. Alarm Schedule Date: 2005/05/02 (Mon) Time: [pm] 06:30 Rep: None Alarm: 00 Hr 01 Min Before Text: CONFERENCE Check the schedule. Back Save

362 5-46 Menu Button Function Delete All Schedule To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [3] to access the Schedule. EXIT 1. Schedule Add/Del/Edit 2. Find Schedule 3. Delete Past Schedule 4. Check Alarm Schedule 5. Delete All Schedule Press [5] to delete all scheduled events. A confirm window displays. Use the "Down" navigation key to select "Yes" that you do want to delete the data, then press the [OK] navigation key. Exit Sel. Customize To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT

363 Menu Button Function CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET Change Language EXIT To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT 1. CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET Press [1] to change language. EXIT

364 5-48 Menu Button Function Register Name To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT 1. CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET JAN ENTER NAME ( ) BACK ABC OK Press [2] to register name. Enter the desired name. Note: Refer to Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) on page Press the [OK] soft key to save the entry. When another station calls you, their LCD will display your name instead of your station number, e.g., "CALL TO JAN". Ring Type To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT

365 Menu Button Function CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET Press [3] to access Ring Type. BACK OK 1. ICM BELL 2. CO BELL Either press [1] to access ICM Ring Type or press [2] to access CO Ring Type. BACK EXIT 1. ICM BELL 2. CO BELL Dial a digit 1-8 to preview the ring tone until you find the desired tone. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save the selection. RING TONE DIAL 1-8 : 1 BACK SAVE EXIT

366 5-50 Menu Button Function Speaker/Headset To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT 1. CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET SELECT SPEAKER/HEADSET (1:SPK 0:HEADSET) : 1 BACK SAVE OK Press [4] to access Speaker/Headset. Enter [1] to select speaker or [0] to select headset. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save the selection. E-MIC Headset To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [4] to access Customize. EXIT

367 Menu Button Function CHANGE LANGUAGE 2. REGISTER NAME 3. RING TYPE 4. SPKR/HEADSET 5. E-MIC HEADSET EAR-MIC HEADSET (1:ON 0:OFF) : OFF BACK SAVE OK Press [5] to access E-MIC Headset. Enter [1] to use an earphone or [0] to not use an earphone. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save the selection. Note: To use an earphone, the speaker mode must be selected in Speaker/Headset mode Setting To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE BACK EXIT

368 5-52 Menu Button Function Enblock Mode To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [1] to set the Enblock Mode to ON or press [0] to set Enblock Mode to OFF. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save the selection. ENBLOCK MODE (1:ON/0:OFF) OFF BACK SAVE EXIT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT / CLEAR STATION 100 (T) SEND When dialing in Enblock Mode, press the [CLEAR] soft key to erase the entered number. When dialing in Enblock Mode, press the [SEND] soft key to make a call. Note: When dialing in Enblock Mode, do not use [HOLD] to make a call.

369 Menu Button Function 5-53 Station COS To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [2] to access Station COS. BACK EXIT 1. TEMPORARY COS 2. WALKING COS BACK EXIT

370 5-54 Menu Button Function Temporary COS To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [2] to access Station COS. BACK EXIT 1. TEMPORARY COS 2. WALKING COS Press [1] to access Temporary COS. Press the [SAVE] soft key to activate the ICM Only COS Mode. ICM ONLY MODE PRESS SAVE KEY BACK SAVE EXIT

371 Menu Button Function TEMPORARY COS 2. WALKING COS Enter the password. Press the [SAVE] soft key to cancel the Temporary COS and restore the COS Mode. ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD BACK SAVE EXIT Walking COS To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [2] to access Station COS. BACK EXIT

372 5-56 Menu Button Function 1. TEMPORARY COS 2. WALKING COS Press [2] to access Walking COS. Enter the COS Override code. Press the [SAVE] soft key to activate the Walking COS Mode. ENTER COS OVERRIDE CODE BACK SAVE EXIT Password Register Password A password can be registered for the station using the following procedure, unless a password has already been programmed for the station in either web-based programming in Tables Data>Authorization Code Table or in PGM 227 programming. To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access the Setting menu. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [3] to access Password. Enter station number and desired password (up to 12 digits). Press the [SAVE] soft key to save it. ENTER PASSWORD: BACK SAVE EXIT

373 Menu Button Function 5-57 Change Password To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Press [3] to access Password. Enter the station number and the current password. Press the [SAVE] soft key. ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD: BACK SAVE EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE Enter the station number and the new password. Press the [SAVE] soft key to save it. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: BACK SAVE EXIT

374 5-58 Menu Button Function Answer Mode To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [5] to access Setting. EXIT 1. ENBLOCK MODE 2. STATION COS 3. PASSWORD 4. ANSWER MODE ENTER ICM ANS MODE H(1) T(2) P(3) BACK SAVE EXIT Press [4] to access Answer Mode. Press the number of the desired mode. [1] Handsfree Mode [2] Tone Mode [3] Private Mode Press the [SAVE] soft key to save it.

375 Menu Button Function 5-59 Voice Mail To access the Menu, press the "Up" navigation key. 1. Ez MENU 6. VOICE MAIL 2. PHONE BOOK 3. SCHEDULE 4. CUSTOMIZE 5. SETTING Press [6] to access Voice Mail. EXIT 1. INT VOICE MAIL 2. EXT VOICE MAIL 3. UNIFIED MESSAGE Press [1], [2], or [3] to specify the type of voice mail being used. 1 = VSF VM 2 = External analog VM 3 = PathFinder IP EXIT

376 5-60 Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) When you are in a window that allows entry of characters, the center soft key displays "ABC" to denote that character entries will all be in uppercase as shown by the following example. "ABC" is the default. New Entry Name :JANE Type :Mobile CO Code :Not Use Number : Group :No Gr. Back ABC Save Pressing this soft key will cycle through three other options. "abc" to denote that character entries will all be in lowercase. "Num" to denote that entries will be number digits. "Sym" to denote that entries will be symbols. You can use a combination of the options to capitalize the first letter of a name, to have the remaining letters in lower case, to add a number, and to add a symbol. The "Sym" option has eight categories of symbols that are accessed by scrolling with the "Up" and "Down" navigation keys. These categories are: Norm (4 pages accessed by "Left" and "Right" navigation keys) Brace (5 pages) Circ (5 pages) Unit (8 pages) Line (7 pages) Seals (10 pages) Fig 2 (7 pages) Fig 1 (10 pages)

377 Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone) 5-61 Alpha characters are entered by selecting either "ABC" or "abc" and then pressing the phone key combinations as shown in the following tables. Table 5-1: Keypad Codes to Program a Station User Name A=[2] L=[5]+[5]+[5] W=[9] B=[2]+[2] M=[6] X=[9]+[9] C=[2]+[2]+[2] N=[6]+[6] Y=[9]+[9]+[9] D=[3] O=[6]+[6]+[6] Z=[9]+[9]+[9]+[9] E=[3]+[3] P=[7] Space=Volume+ F=[3]+[3]+[3] Q=[7]+[7] Period=[0] G=[4] R=[7]+[7]+[7] Back=[SPEED] H=[4]+[4] S=[7]+[7]+[7]+[7] #=[#] I=[4]+[4]+[4] T=[8] *=[*] J=[5] K=[5]+[5] V=[8]+[8]+[8] Table 5-2: Keypad Codes for Phone Book/Schedule/Custom Message/Dial-By-Name/& SMS Entries, & Speed Dial Bin Naming Other Codes 1 = 10 6 = 60 Space = 1 2 = 20 7 = 70, = 3 3 = 30 8 = 80 : = 2 4 = 40 9 = 90. = 13 5 = 50 0 = 00 = 0

378 5-62 Entering Characters (IP7024LD Phone)

379 6-1 6 Web-based Station Programming This chapter describes using web-based Station Programming.

380

381 Station Programming Intro 6-3 Station Programming Intro Upon initial access of web-based programming, you are presented with two options - Station Programming and Admin & Maintenance Programming (refer to Figure 6-1 on page 6-4. The web-based Station Programming option allows users to configure the following areas of programming: Station Attributes User Name Registration ICM Signaling Mode DND Authorization Code Call Forward Station Call Forward Preset Call Forward Station Speed Dial Pre-Selected Message Canned Messages Custom Messages Flex Buttons Assignment Station List Management

382 6-4 Station Programming Intro Figure 6-1: Web-Based Programming Options To enter web-based Station Programming, you are required to enter a Station Number and its associated Station Password. You must obtain the Station Password from the administrator, who has programmed the password in the web-based Admin Programming under Tables Data/Authorization Code Table (PGM 227).

383 Station Programming Intro 6-5 Station Attributes User Name Registration You can register a name. The name then displays on the LCD of the keyset.» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+7+4. ICM Signaling Mode You can select a Station ICM Mode (H/P/T) H = Handsfree P = Privacy T = Tone» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+1+3. DND You can place your station in a Do Not Disturb (DND mode to block incoming ring for CO/IP and intercom calls, tranfers, and paging announcements.» This is the same as pressing the [DND] button on an IP keyset.

384 6-6 Station Programming Intro Authorization Code When a Station code is entered, the system applies the Class of Service associated with the station for all uses (Off Premise Call Forward, DISA, CO/IP line access, and Walking COS.» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+3+3. Call Forward Figure 6-2: Call Forward (1 of 2)

385 Station Programming Intro 6-7 Station Call Forward You can have selected incoming calls re-routed to other stations (local or networked), station groups, the VSF, or over a system CO/IP line (Off-Net). The Call Forward Types are: Unconditional Busy No Answer Busy / No Answer Incoming CO Off-Net (Attendant only - this entry is not shown if a non-attendant station is used for entry into web-based Station Programming)» This programming is the same as IP keyset [Speaker]+[FWD]+Call Forward Code (1-5)+Destination.

386 6-8 Station Programming Intro Preset Call Forward Figure 6-3: Call Forward (2 of 2)

387 Station Programming Intro 6-9 Calls to a station can be forwarded to a predetermined destination assigned in the system database. Call Forward Types are: Unconditional Internal Busy Internal No Answer External Busy External No Answer Transfer Mailbox» This programming is the same as IP keyset Admin Programming [PGM 120]+Call Forward Type (Btn 1-6)+Forwarding Location Type (Btn 1-3)+Destination. Station Speed Dial Each station user can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins.» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+[SPEED]+Station Speed Dial bin number+co/ip access code+dial number+name.

388 6-10 Station Programming Intro Preselected Message Canned Messages You can select a message to be displayed on the LCD of another IP Phone in the system. Messages include: Index 1 = Lunch Return at Time Index 2 = On Vacation Return at Date Index 3 = Out of Office Return at Time Index 4 = Out of Office Return at Date Index 5 = Out of Office Return Unknown Index 6 = Call to Station Index 7 = In Office Station Index 8 = In a Meeting Time Index 9 = At Home Index 10 = At Branch Office» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+5+1+Message number (01-10)+auxiliary input.

389 Station Programming Intro 6-11 Custom Messages You can select a message to be displayed on the LCD of another IP Phone in the system. Messages include: Index 0 = Station Custom Message (a message that you can change to fit your specific situation) Index = System Custom Messages (a message that the administrator has created that you can use but cannot change)» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+5+1+Message number (00 or 11-20).

390 6-12 Station Programming Intro Flex Buttons Assignment You can program a telephone number directly to a Flex button without the need to assign the number to a Speed Dial bin.» This programming is the same as IP keyset [PGM]+[Flex Btn]+telephone number+[save].

391 Station Programming Intro 6-13 Station List Management You can manage and control other stations by using Station List. Station List is constructed by the INSERT and DELETE functions. For example, if station 101 wants to manage station 102 and 103, the station 101 user types the Station Number (102) and the Password for station 102, then clicks on "INSERT". The process is repeated for station 103. If the station 101 user does not want to manage station 102 and 103 any longer, station 101 checks the associated boxes in the Station List, then clicks "DELETE". Supported Station Management functions include: DND Preselected Message Call Forward Flex Button Assignments Station Speed Dial

392 6-14 Station Programming Intro